Sony HDW 750CE User Manual

HD CAMCORDER  
HDW-750  
HDW-750CE  
OPERATION MANUAL [English]  
1st Edition (Revised 3)  
WARNING  
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit  
to rain or moisture.  
To avoid electrical shock, do not open the cabinet.  
Refer servicing to qualified personnel only.  
AVERTISSEMENT  
Afin d’éviter tout risque d’incendie ou d’électrocution,  
ne pas exposer cet appareil à la pluie ou à l’humidité.  
Afin d’écarter tout risque d’électrocution, garder le  
coffret fermé. Ne confier l’entretien de l’appareil qu’à  
un personnel qualifié.  
WARNUNG  
Um Feuergefahr und die Gefahr eines elektrischen  
Schlages zu vermeiden, darf das Gerät weder Regen  
noch Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt werden.  
Um einen elektrischen Schlag zu vermeiden, darf das  
Gehäuse nicht geöffnet werden. Überlassen Sie  
Wartungsarbeiten stets nur qualifiziertem  
Fachpersonal.  
For the customers in USA  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with  
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15  
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses,  
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause  
harmful interference to radio communications. However,  
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be  
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user  
is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or  
more of the following measures:  
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
— Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit  
different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
— Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV  
technician for help.  
You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not  
expressly approved in this manual could void your  
authority to operate this equipment.  
The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual  
must be used with this equipment in order to comply with  
the limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part  
15 of FCC Rules.  
For the customers in Europe  
This product with the CE marking complies with the EMC  
Directive (89/336/EEC) issued by the Commission of the  
European Community.  
Compliance with this directive implies conformity to the  
following European standards:  
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference (Emission)  
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility (Immunity)  
This product is intended for use in the following  
Electromagnetic Environment(s):  
E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light industrial), E3  
(urban outdoors) and E4 (controlled EMC environment, ex.  
TV studio).  
Pour les clients européens  
Ce produit portant la marque CE est conforme à la  
Directive sur la compatibilité électromagnétique (EMC) (89/  
336/CEE) émise par la Commission de la Communauté  
européenne.  
La conformité à cett directive implique la conformité aux  
normes européennes suivantes:  
• EN55103-1: Interférences électromagnétiques  
(émission)  
• EN55103-2: Sensibilité électromagnétique (immunité)  
Ce produit est prévu pour être utilisé dans les  
environnements électromagnétiques suivants:  
E1 (résidentiel), E2 (commercial et industrie légère), E3  
(urbain extérieur) et E4 (environnement EMC contrôlé, ex.  
studio de télévision).  
Für Kunden in Europa  
Dieses Produkt besitzt die CE-Kennzeichnung und erfüllt  
die EMV-Direktive (89/336/EEC) der EG-Kommission.  
Die Erfüllung dieser Direktive bedeutet Konformität für die  
folgenden Europäischen Normen:  
• EN55103-1: Elektromagnetische Interferenz (Emission)  
• EN55103-2: Elektromagnetische Empfindlichkeit  
(Immunität)  
Dieses Produkt ist für den Einsatz unter folgenden  
elektromagnetischen Bedingungen ausgelegt:  
E1 (Wohnbereich), E2 (kommerzieller und in  
beschränktem Maße industrieller Bereich), E3  
(Stadtbereich im Freien) und E4 (kontrollierter EMV-  
Bereich, z.B. Fernsehstudio).  
Table of Contents  
Chapter 1 Overview  
1-1 Features ..................................................................................... 1-1  
1-1-1 Camera Features ............................................................... 1-1  
1-1-2 VTR Features .................................................................... 1-4  
1-2 Example of System Configuration .......................................... 1-6  
1-3 Precautions ................................................................................ 1-8  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and  
Controls  
2-1 Power Supply ............................................................................ 2-1  
2-2 Accessory Attachments ............................................................ 2-3  
2-3 Audio Functions ........................................................................ 2-5  
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions ...................... 2-14  
2-5 Menu Operating Section ........................................................ 2-28  
2-6 Time Code System .................................................................. 2-32  
2-7 Warnings and Indications ...................................................... 2-38  
2-8 Warnings and Indications on the Display Panel.................. 2-41  
2-9 Indicators on the Viewfinder ................................................. 2-45  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
3-1 About Cassettes ......................................................................... 3-1  
3-1-1 Loading and Unloading a Cassette .................................. 3-1  
3-1-2 Preventing Accidental Erasure ........................................ 3-5  
3-2 Recording .................................................................................. 3-6  
3-2-1 Basic Procedure ............................................................... 3-6  
3-2-2 Continuous Recording ................................................... 3-12  
3-2-3 Recording Good Shot Markers...................................... 3-15  
3-2-4 Recording a Recording Start Marker ............................ 3-19  
3-2-5 Starting a Shoot with a Few Seconds of Pre-Stored Picture  
Data (Loop Rec Function) (When Using an HKDW-703  
Extension Board) ........................................................... 3-19  
(Continued)  
Table of Contents  
1
3-2-6 Shooting Pictures at Intervals (Interval Rec Function)  
(When Using the HKDW-703) ..................................... 3-27  
3-2-7 Continuous Recording on the Previous Cut .................. 3-44  
3-2-8 Searching for the Last Recorded Portion and Turning in  
the Recording Pause Mode (End Search Function) ...... 3-45  
3-3 Checking the Recording — Playback ................................... 3-46  
3-3-1 Checking the Last Two Seconds of the Recording —  
Recording Review ......................................................... 3-46  
3-3-2 Checking the Recording on the Color Video  
Monitor — Playback in Color ....................................... 3-47  
3-4 Recording the Recording Start Time Code onto  
the Memory Label - Tele-File ................................................ 3-49  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for  
Recording  
4-1 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance ............ 4-1  
4-1-1 Adjusting the Black Balance ........................................... 4-2  
4-1-2 Adjusting the White Balance .......................................... 4-6  
4-2 Setting the Electronic Shutter ............................................... 4-12  
4-2-1 Shutter Modes ............................................................... 4-12  
4-2-2 Selecting the Shutter Mode and Speed.......................... 4-13  
4-3 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris  
Adjustment .............................................................................. 4-20  
4-4 Adjusting the Audio Level ..................................................... 4-27  
4-5 Setting the Time Data ............................................................. 4-34  
4-5-1 Setting the Time Code ................................................... 4-34  
4-5-2 Saving the Real Time in the Time Code ....................... 4-36  
4-5-3 Setting the User Bits...................................................... 4-37  
4-5-4 Synchronizing the Time Code ....................................... 4-39  
4-5-5 Setting the Cassette Numbers and Shot Numbers ......... 4-44  
4-6 Menu Display on the Viewfinder Screen .............................. 4-46  
4-6-1 Menu Configuration ...................................................... 4-46  
4-6-2 Basic Use of the Menu .................................................. 4-49  
4-6-3 Editing the USER Menu................................................ 4-55  
2
Table of Contents  
4-7 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen ............................. 4-64  
4-7-1 Layout of the Status Display on the  
Viewfinder Screen ......................................................... 4-65  
4-7-2 Selecting the Display Items ........................................... 4-69  
4-7-3 Display Mode and Setting Change and Adjustment  
Progress Messages ........................................................ 4-72  
4-7-4 Setting the Marker Display ........................................... 4-74  
4-7-5 Setting the Viewfinder .................................................. 4-77  
4-7-6 Recording Superimposed Shot Data in Color Bars ....... 4-80  
4-7-7 Setting the Shot ID ........................................................ 4-83  
4-7-8 Displaying the Status Confirmation Windows .............. 4-89  
4-7-9 Confirming the Image of the Return Video Signal  
on the Viewfinder .......................................................... 4-93  
4-8 Adjustments and Settings from Menus ................................ 4-97  
4-8-1 Setting the GAIN Selector Values ................................ 4-97  
4-8-2 Selecting the Output Signals ....................................... 4-100  
4-8-3 Setting the Color Temperature Manually .................... 4-103  
4-8-4 Specifying an Offset for the Auto White Balance  
Setting ......................................................................... 4-105  
4-8-5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1/2 Switches ........... 4-108  
4-8-6 Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock ............... 4-113  
4-8-7 Selecting the Lens File ................................................ 4-116  
4-9 Saving/Loading User Menu Data to/from  
Memory Stick ....................................................................... 4-118  
4-9-1 Handling the Memory Stick ........................................ 4-118  
4-9-2 Saving/Loading User Menu Data to/from  
Memory Stick .............................................................. 4-122  
4-10 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard  
Settings................................................................................... 4-133  
4-11 Using the Scene Files ............................................................ 4-135  
4-11-1 Storing Data in the Scene File ..................................... 4-135  
4-11-2 Loading Scene Files .................................................... 4-145  
4-11-3 Resetting the Settings of the Camcorder to the Standard  
Settings Saved in the Reference File ........................... 4-150  
(Continued)  
Table of Contents  
3
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
5-1 Power Supply ............................................................................ 5-1  
5-1-1 Using a BP-L60A Battery Pack ...................................... 5-1  
5-1-2 Avoiding Breaks in Operation Due to Dead Batteries .... 5-4  
5-1-3 Using an AC Adaptor ...................................................... 5-5  
5-1-4 Using the Anton Bauer Ultralight System ...................... 5-6  
5-2 Adjusting the Viewfinder ......................................................... 5-7  
5-2-1 Adjusting the Viewfinder Position .................................. 5-7  
5-2-2 Detaching the Viewfinder ............................................... 5-9  
5-3 Mounting the Lens .................................................................. 5-11  
5-4 Adjusting the Flange Focal Length ....................................... 5-12  
5-5 Audio Input System ................................................................ 5-14  
5-5-1 Using the Supplied Microphone.................................... 5-14  
5-5-2 Using an External Microphone ..................................... 5-16  
5-5-3 Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner (for a UHF Wireless  
Microphone System) ..................................................... 5-21  
5-5-4 Connecting Line Input Audio Equipment ..................... 5-25  
5-6 Tripod Mounting .................................................................... 5-26  
5-7 Attaching the Shoulder Strap ................................................ 5-28  
5-8 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position .................................... 5-30  
5-9 Putting On the Rain Cover .................................................... 5-31  
5-10 Connecting the Remote Control Unit ................................... 5-33  
Chapter 6 Maintenance  
6-1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting ................................ 6-1  
6-1-1 Preparations for Testing .................................................. 6-1  
6-1-2 Testing the Camera ......................................................... 6-2  
6-1-3 Testing the VTR .............................................................. 6-6  
6-2 Maintenance ............................................................................ 6-12  
6-2-1 Cleaning the Video Heads ............................................. 6-12  
6-2-2 Cleaning the Viewfinder ............................................... 6-12  
6-3 Operation Warnings ............................................................... 6-16  
4
Table of Contents  
Appendix  
Specifications ..................................................................................... A-1  
Video Camera Section ............................................................... A-2  
VTR Section .............................................................................. A-3  
Supplied Accessories ................................................................. A-6  
Recommended Additional Equipment ...................................... A-6  
Menu List ........................................................................................... A-9  
OPERATION Menu List ........................................................... A-9  
PAINT Menu List .................................................................... A-19  
MAINTENANCE Menu List .................................................. A-31  
FILE Menu List ....................................................................... A-35  
DIAGNOSIS Menu List .......................................................... A-37  
Index .................................................................................................... I-1  
Table of Contents  
5
1-1 Features  
The HDW-750/750CE1) HD Camcorder combines a HD color video  
camera, of which the effective picture elements are 1920(H) x 1080(V)  
and which uses 2/3-type Power HAD 2) sensor CCD 3) imagers with  
2,000,000 picture elements, with an HDCAM portable videocassette  
recorder. Its excellent image quality, sensitivity, portability, and dust-  
and water-proof construction make it ideal as a camcorder for ENG 4)  
and EFP 5) in the same way as the earlier BVW-400A/400AP. The  
introduction of a new integrated circuit technology (LSI) for processing  
HD digital signals improves the image quality even further and  
simplifies setup (initialization) operations.  
1
1-1-1 Camera Features  
The features of the HDW-750/750CE camera are described below.  
2/3-type Power HAD sensor CCDs with 2,000,000 picture elements  
provide a compact and lightweight unit with excellent image quality.  
Existing 2/3-inch lenses can be used.  
A new integrated circuit technology of the digital signal processing has  
improved picture quality and functionability.  
A setup menu enables you to control features such as status displays,  
messages, and markers; to select various types of settings; to toggle  
switches; and to operate a memory stick.  
Blur-free shooting is ensured by a built-in, high-performance electronic  
shutter that provides a variety of modes, such as ECS 5) mode which  
reduces flickering on the monitor screen and S-EVS 6) mode which  
improves vertical resolution.  
Selectable video gain ensures a noise-free image.  
....................................................................................................................................  
1) The HDW-750 operates with 59.94I among the HD formats. The HDW-750CE  
operates with 50I among the HD formats.  
2) Power HAD: Power Hole-Accumulated Diode  
Power HADis a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.  
3) CCD: Charge-Coupled Device  
4) ENG: Electronic News Gathering  
5) FEP: Electronic Field Production  
6) ECS: Extended Clear Scan  
7) S-EVS: Super Enhanced Vertical definition System  
Chapter 1 Overview  
1-1  
A simple switch operation enables automatic adjustment of the black  
set, black balance, and white balance. Memory functions make it easy  
to replicate the white balance setting appropriate for the lighting  
conditions.  
1
The ATW 1) function automatically adjusts the white balance for the  
varying lighting conditions during shooting.  
The TruEye2) process is used to ensure naturally colored pictures  
even when shooting very bright subject.  
The video gain can be boosted to 42 dB instantly using the TURBO  
GAIN button.  
Character display functions on the viewfinder indicate switch settings,  
automatic black and white balance adjustment, status indications, and  
warnings.  
The warning system uses various types of warning indicators and  
sounds to inform you of VTR faults, end of tape, low battery, etc.  
The camcorder is equipped with a dual-wheel filter disk for adjusting  
the filter setting to the shooting and lighting conditions.  
Override function which makes fine adjustment of the reference value  
for brightness of automatic iris control is provided.  
A built-in circuit produces a color bar signal for easy adjustment of the  
color monitor.  
The RM-B150 remote control unit (not supplied) controls camera  
functions and VTR functions.  
Setup data made on the USER menu, including the various marker  
settings, can be stored on a memory stick as a user file. After storage, it  
can be recalled.  
Setup data specified by video engineers, including the various detail  
settings, can be stored in the camcorder itself and on a memory stick as  
a reference file. After storage it can be loaded. This makes it possible  
to shorten setup time by duplicating the stored reference file to other  
cameras through the memory stick.  
....................................................................................................................................  
1) ATW: Auto Tracing While balance  
2) TruEye:  
TruEyeis a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.  
1-2  
Chapter 1 Overview  
Setup data specified by video engineers, including the video settings,  
can be stored in the camcorder itself and on a memory stick as a scene  
file. This makes it possible to load setup data appropriate for the scene.  
Correction values for lens extenders and individual lenses can be stored  
as a lens file. The values can then be recalled. This makes it possible  
to shorten adjustment time when the lens is replaced.  
1
A high-performance viewfinder is adjustable forward, backward, and  
sideways, and has a full range of auxiliary equipment.  
The camcorder is provided with the XLR 5-pin connector, which  
allows connection of a stereo microphone. The ASSIGN 1/2 switches  
allow microphone mode to be switched between stereo and monaural.  
The HD SDI output (corresponding to Embedded Audio) makes it  
possible to monitor the camera image and playback image.  
Attaching the HKDW-702 down converter (not supplied) (converting  
to 525i/625i signal 1)) allows the camera image and playback image to  
be monitored on the NTSC/PAL monitor. This board makes it possible  
to output the SDI signal (corresponding to Embedded Audio).  
Three down converter modes are available: SQUEEZE, LETTER BOX  
and CROP.  
The camcorder is provided with the LIGHT connector. This feeds  
power to the light from a battery or AC adaptor connected to the  
camcorder.  
The viewfinder supplied with NTSC/PAL type camcorders, such as the  
BVW-400A/400AP, can be attached to the HDW-750/750CE in  
emergencies (only when the HKDW-702 (not supplied) is attached).  
Some functions are not available with this viewfinder.  
The camcorder has the ASSIGN 1/2 switches, which can be assigned  
functions.  
....................................................................................................................................  
1) When the HKDW-702 is attached to the HDW-750, the HD signal is down-  
converted to the 525i signal. When the HKDW-702 is attached to the HDW-  
750CE, the HD signal is down-converted to the 625i signal.  
Chapter 1 Overview  
1-3  
1-1-2 VTR Features  
1
The VTR features of this camcorder are described below.  
Use of the HDCAM format allows high performance HD digital  
recording and playback while preserving the same ease of use as  
conventional camcorder equipment.  
The same cassette size (S size) as Digital BETACAM can be used to  
achieve a long recording time of approximately 40 minutes (for 59.94I  
format) and 48 minutes (for 50I format).  
No playback adaptor is needed to see the color playback image on the  
monitor screen.  
The 4 times normal speed search function provides quick positioning  
of the tape.  
LTC1) and VITC2) recording and LTC playback can be performed.  
It is possible to record recording start markers and good shot markers  
on the tape while shooting, and search automatically for required cuts  
when editing.  
It is possible to automatically rewind and review the last 2 seconds of  
the recording on the tape for a quick check immediately after shooting.  
Compatible with the Tele-File3) Memory Label system.  
By pressing the RET button on the lens while recording, the timecode  
valid when you pressed the button is recorded on the MLB-1M-100  
memory label (not supplied) attached to the cassette. This is very  
helpful for management of the cassette tapes and to improve the  
efficiency of the tape editing.  
The built-in time code generator can be synchronized with an external  
....................................................................................................................................  
1) LTC: Longitudinal Time Code  
2) VITC: Vertical Interval Time Code  
3) Tele-File  
The Tele-File system is a non-contact data reading/writing system. It allows a  
variety of data to be stored on a 1/2-inch tape label with an non-contact IC  
memory.  
1-4  
Chapter 1 Overview  
generator.  
1
A lithium battery is the back-up power supply for the built-in time code  
generator enabling the time code to be held for approximately 5 years  
without charging the camcorder power supply.  
Optional long-life battery packs are available.  
Pressing the VTR START button on the camcorder or the VTR button  
on the lens ensures recording continuity from the very next frame.  
The time code is displayed in the LCD window screen even when the  
power is off. The automatic power shut-off function has three time  
code indication settings.  
The camcorder continuously stores a few seconds of the most recent  
picture data. Recording is started with this data when the REC button is  
pressed. This prevents the loss of picture data (Loop Rec function).  
(This feature is available when HKDW-703 (not supplied) is attached.)  
A slot-in UHF portable tuner WRR-855A/855B (not supplied) can be  
attached.  
Four channels of analog audio can be converted to 20-bit digital  
signals. The converted four channels of digital audio can then be  
recorded.  
Connecting the HDCA-901 camera adaptor (not supplied) allows the  
input of four audio channels. This also makes it possible for the HD-  
SDI signal to be output.  
When connecting the audio cable to AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors  
(XLR 3-pin), the audio signals input to the XLR 3-pin are recorded  
regardless of the AUDIO IN switch setting. This function is called the  
XLR connection automatic detection function.  
The AUDIO OUT connector (XLR 5-pin) allows the camcorder to  
output signals from two channels at the same time (stereo recording).  
The camcorder searches for the most recently recorded cut and records  
the new cut over it. (RE-TAKE function)  
The camcorder searches for the point most recently recorded on the  
tape and automatically switches to paused recording mode (rec pause).  
(End Search function)  
Chapter 1 Overview  
1-5  
1-2 Example of System  
Configuration  
The diagram below shows a typical configuration of the camcorder for  
ENG and EFP.  
1
Viewfinder-related equipment  
Fog-proof filter  
(Part No. 1-547-341-11)  
Video monitor for  
color image check  
while shooting  
BKDW-701  
Servo filter unit  
BKW-401 Viewfinder  
Rotation Bracket  
Extension  
board  
HKDW-703 for  
picture cache  
HKDW-702 a) for  
converting the signal  
to 525i/625i signal  
Memory stick  
Remote controll  
equipment  
RM-B150 Remote  
Control Unit  
a) Be sure to attach the HKDW-702/1 or  
higher to the HDW-750CE.  
1-6  
Chapter 1 Overview  
1
For more information about the fittings, connections, or use of additional  
equipment and accessories, see Chapter 5 as well as the operation manuals for  
the connected equipment.  
Camera adaptor  
Lens assembly b) (2.8 D to +2.0 D)  
(Part No. A-8262-537-A)  
Lens assembly b) (3.6 D to 0.8 D)  
(Part No. A-8262-538-A)  
Lens assembly b) (3.6 D to +0.4 D)  
(Part No. A-8267-737-A)  
Lens assembly b)  
HDCA-901 for the input of  
the audio channels 3 and  
4 and the HD-SDI output  
(3 × magnification)  
(2.4 D to +0.5 D)  
(Part No. A-8314-798-A)  
Audio signal source  
Power source  
External microphone  
Battery  
C-74, etc.  
AC power  
BC-L120  
supply c)  
CAC-12 Microphone  
Battery  
Holder  
Charger  
Audio equipment  
AC-550/  
550CE  
AC Adaptor  
BP-L60A  
Battery Pack  
WRR- 810A/860A/862A/  
862B UHF Portable Tuner  
AC-DN2B  
AC Adaptor  
WRR-855A/855B slot-  
in UHF portable tuner  
CCXA-53 audio cable  
b) For more information, see  
“Viewfinder and related equipment”  
on page A-7.  
c) 120 V AC or 220 to 240 V AC  
Chapter 1 Overview  
1-7  
1-3 Precautions  
Use and Storage  
1
Do not subject the camcorder to severe shocks  
The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body warped.  
After use  
Always turn off the power.  
Before storing the camcorder for a long period  
Remove the battery pack.  
Use and storage locations  
Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or storing the camcorder  
in the following places.  
Places subject to temperature extremes  
Very damp places  
Places subject to severe vibration  
Near strong magnetic fields  
In direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods  
To prevent electromagnetic interference from portable  
communications devices  
The use of portable telephones and other communications devices near  
this unit can result in misoperations and interference with audio and  
video signals.  
It is recommended that the portable communications devices near this  
unit be powered off.  
1-8  
Chapter 1 Overview  
2-1 Power Supply  
2
1
2
4
3
Power supply  
1 Battery attachment  
Attach a BP-L60A battery pack.  
Furthermore, by attaching an AC-DN2B AC Adaptor, you can operate  
the camcorder from AC power.  
2 DC IN (external power input) connector (XLR type, 4-pin, male)  
To operate the HDW-750/750CE using an AC power supply, connect an  
AC-550/550CE AC Adaptor with the DC output cable supplied with the  
adaptor.  
To use an external battery, connect its DC output cable to the DC IN  
connector.  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
2-1  
3 POWER switch  
This switch turns the main power supply on and off.  
4 LIGHT switch  
2
This switch selects the way in which a video light connected to the  
LIGHT connector is switched on and off.  
AUTO: When the video light switch is turned on, starting recording with  
the VTR turns on the light.  
MANUAL: The video light switch controls the light, turning it on and  
off manually.  
2-2  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
2-2 Accessory Attachments  
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
8
Lens cable clamp  
Accessory attachments  
1 Shoulder strap posts  
Attach the supplied shoulder strap to these posts.  
2 Light shoe  
Attach an optional accessory such as a video light to this shoe.  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
2-3  
3 LIGHT connector (2-pin, female)  
Connect the cable of the Anton Bauer Ultralight System attached to the  
light shoe. The system operates with lights powered by 12 V, with a  
maximum power consumption of 50 W.  
2
4 Lens mount (special bayonet mount)  
Use this for mounting the lens.  
5 Lens locking lever  
After inserting the lens in the lens mount, rotate the lens mount ring with  
this lever to lock the lens in position.  
6 Lens mount cap  
Remove this cap by pushing up on the lens locking lever. For protection  
from dust, always insert this cap when no lens is mounted.  
7 LENS connector (12-pin)  
Fit the lens cable to this connector. Contact your Sony representative for  
more information about the lens you are using.  
8 Tripod mount  
When using the unit on a tripod, attach the supplied tripod adaptor.  
9 Shoulder pad  
You can move the shoulder pad forwards or backwards by loosening the  
two screws. Do this to ensure the best balance when shooting with the  
camcorder on your shoulder.  
2-4  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
2-3 Audio Functions  
1
2
2
3
Audio functions (1)  
1 Microphone  
This is a super-cardioid directional stereo microphone with an external  
power supply (+48 V) system.  
If you assign the Front MIC MONO/STEREO function to either  
ASSIGN 1 or 2 switch, you can switch the monaural and stereo outputs.  
2 MIC IN (microphone input) connector (XLR type, 5-pin, female)  
You can connect a supplied stereo microphone with an external power  
supply system. The connector supplies power (+48 V) to the  
microphone.  
3 MIC LEVEL knob  
This knob adjusts the audio level of the microphone connected to the  
MIC IN connector.  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
2-5  
ADVANCE  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
LEVEL  
4
CH-3  
CH-4  
2
0
10  
0
10  
F-RUN  
F
R
W
REGEN  
CLOCK  
SET  
AUTO  
R-RUN  
MANUAL  
MEMORY STICK  
OPEN  
5
6
7
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CUE IN  
AUDIO IN  
DATA DISPLAY  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
F
R
W
FRONT  
REAR  
WIRELESS  
U-BIT  
TIME  
SHOT  
NO  
8
9
q;  
Audio functions (2)  
2-6  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
4 LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) (audio channel 1 and channel 2 recording  
level) controls  
These controls adjust the audio levels of channels 1 and 2 when audio  
input is from the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors and the AUDIO  
SELECT switches are set to MANUAL.  
2
5 AUDIO SELECT (CH-1/CH-2) (audio channel-1 and channel-2  
adjustment method select) switches  
These switches select the audio level adjustment method for each of  
audio channels 1 and 2.  
AUTO: Select this setting for automatic adjustment.  
MANUAL: Select this setting for manual adjustment.  
6 AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 / CH-3/CH-4 (audio input select)  
switches  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches  
These switches select the audio input signals to be recorded for audio  
channels 1 and 2.  
FRONT: The input signal source is the microphone connected to the  
MIC IN connector.  
REAR: The input signal source is the audio equipment connected to the  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors.  
WIRELESS: The input signal source is a WRR-855A/855B UHF  
Synthesized Tuner Unit (not supplied).  
CH-3/CH-4 switches  
These switches select the audio input signals to be recorded for audio  
channels 3 and 4.  
Note  
To activate CH-3/CH-4 switches, set AUDIO CH3/4 MODE to SW on  
the VTR MODE 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
F (FRONT): The input signal source is the microphone connected to the  
MIC IN connector.  
R (REAR): The input signal source is the audio equipment connected to  
the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors.  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
2-7  
W (WIRELESS): The input signal source is a WRR-855A/855B UHF  
Synthesized Tuner Unit (not supplied).  
With the HDCA-901 (not supplied) connected to the camcorder, you can  
record separate sounds in audio channels 3 and 4.  
2
7 CUE IN (cue track input) switch  
This switch selects the input signal to be recorded on the cue track.  
CH-1: Signal selected by the AUDIO IN CH-1 switch 6  
MIX: Mixed signals selected by the AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2  
switches 6  
CH-2: Signal selected by the AUDIO IN CH-2 switch 6  
8 AUDIO OUT (audio output) connector (XLR type, 5-pin, male)  
This connector outputs the audio signals recorded to audio channels 1  
and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4.  
The MONITOR CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switches qd allow you to select the  
audio signal to be played back.  
Using a CCXA-53 Audio Cable (not supplied), you can convert from a 5-pin  
connection to two 3-pin connections.  
9 AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel 1 and channel 2 input)  
connectors (XLR type, 3-pin, female) and LINE/MIC/+48 V ON  
(line input/microphone input/external power supply +48 V ON)  
switches  
These are audio input connectors for channels 1 and 2 to which you can  
connect audio equipment or a microphone.  
The LINE/MIC/+48V ON switches select the audio source of the audio  
input signals connected to each of these connectors.  
LINE: Line input audio equipment  
MIC: Microphone with an internal power supply  
+48V ON: Microphone with an external power supply system  
0 DC OUT (DC power output) connector  
This connector supplies power for a WRR-810A/860A/862A/862B UHF  
Portable Tuner (not supplied). Do not connect any equipment other than  
the UHF portable tuner.  
2-8  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
2
qd  
qs  
qa  
Audio functions (3)  
qa ALARM volume control  
This control adjusts the speaker or earphone alarm volume. At the  
minimum position, no sound can be heard.  
ALARM  
Minimum  
Maximum  
ALARM volume control  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
2-9  
The internal volume control can be adjusted so that the alarm is audible  
even if the ALARM volume control is at the minimum position.  
For more information, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
2
qs MONITOR volume control  
This control adjusts the speaker or earphone volume for sounds other  
than the alarm sound. At the minimum position, no sound can be heard.  
qd MONITOR (audio channel select) switch /CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 (audio  
channel 1/2 / audio channel 3/4 select) switch  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
CH-3  
MIX  
CH-4  
MONITOR switch  
CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch  
CH-1/2  
CH-3/4  
MONITOR switch and CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch  
CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch  
This switch decides the audio channel to be selected by the MONITOR  
switch.  
CH-1/2: Audio channels 1 and 2  
CH-3/4: Audio channels 3 and 4  
The following settings depend on the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch setting:  
The signal output to the AUDIO OUT connector 8 is switched.  
CH-1/2: Audio channels 1 and 2  
CH-3/4: Audio channels 3 and 4  
The audio signal indicated by the audio level meter in the display  
window is switched.  
2-10 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
MONITOR switch  
This switch selects the audio output to the speaker or earphone.  
CH-1/2 CH-3/4 MONITOR switch  
Audio output  
2
position  
position  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-1/2  
Audio channel 1  
Mix sound of channels 1 and 2  
Audio channel 2  
CH-2  
CH-3  
MIX  
CH-3/4  
Audio channel 3  
Mix sound of channels 3 and 4  
Audio channel 4  
CH-4  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2-11  
qf  
2
qg  
Audio functions (4)  
qf Built-in speaker  
During recording, the speaker can be used for monitoring the E-E1)  
sound, and during playback for monitoring playback sound. The speaker  
also sounds alarms to reinforce visual warnings.  
If an earphone is plugged into to the EARPHONE jack, the speaker  
sound is automatically cut off.  
See “6-3 Operation Warnings” on page 6-16 for information about alarms.  
....................................................................................................................................  
1) E-E sound (Electric-to-Electric sound)  
The term E-E sound refers to an audio signal that has passed though the  
amplifier, but has not been recorded on the tape. In other words, you can directly  
monitor the recording input signal, as opposed to the simultaneous playback  
(output) signal.  
2-12 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
qg EARPHONE jacks (minijack)  
You can monitor the E-E sound during recording and playback sound  
during playback. Plugging an earphone into the jack automatically cuts  
off the built-in speaker, and you hear the alarms about the camcorder's  
operation and status through the earphone.  
The signals output from these jacks are the same. You can connect two  
earphones to these jacks at the same time.  
2
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2-13  
2-4 Shooting and Recording/  
Playback Functions  
Eyecup  
7 8  
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
q;  
qa  
9
qs  
Shooting and recording/playback functions (1)  
1 TALLY indicator  
Setting the TALLY switch to HIGH or LOW activates this indicator. The  
indicator lights during recording on the VTR. It also provides the same  
information as the REC indicator in the viewfinder: it comes on during  
recording and flashes to indicate a problem.  
2-14 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
2 BRIGHT (brightness) control  
This control adjusts the picture brightness on the viewfinder screen. It  
has no effect on the camera output signal.  
2
3 CONTRAST control  
This control adjusts the picture contrast on the viewfinder screen. It has  
no effect on the camera output signal.  
4 PEAKING control  
This control adjusts the sharpness of the picture on the viewfinder screen  
to make focusing easier. It has no effect on the camera output signal.  
5 ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch  
This switch controls the zebra pattern on the viewfinder screen.  
ON: The zebra pattern 1) is displayed and stays.  
OFF: No zebra pattern is displayed.  
MOMENT: The zebra pattern is displayed and stays for 5 to 6 seconds.  
The zebra pattern is factory set to indicate picture areas where the  
video level is approximately 70%. The setup menu can be used to  
specify that areas where the video level is 100% and above are to be  
displayed at the same time.  
For information about how to set the zebra pattern is to be displayed to indicate  
areas of 100% or more, see “4-7-5 Setting the Viewfinder” on page 4-77.  
....................................................................................................................................  
1) Zebra pattern  
The zebra pattern aids in manual iris adjustment by indicating areas of the  
picture where the video level is approximately 70% and 100% and above.  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2-15  
6 TALLY switch  
This switch controls the TALLY indicator, setting its brightness (HIGH  
or LOW) or turning it off.  
HIGH: The TALLY indicator gets brighter.  
OFF: The TALLY indicator does not operate.  
LOW: The TALLY indicator gets dimmer.  
2
7 Viewfinder  
The viewfinder lets you to view the camera image in black and white  
while shooting the picture and also see the playback picture from the  
VTR. It also displays various warnings and messages related to the  
settings or operating conditions of the camcorder, a zebra pattern, safety  
zone marker1), and center marker2).  
Also, you can use the BVF-V20/V20CE black and white viewfinder with  
the 525i/625i method and BVF-VC10 color viewfinder.  
8 Diopter adjustment ring  
Use this ring to adjust the viewfinder image for your vision.  
9 Viewfinder front-rear positioning lever  
Use this lever to move the viewfinder forward or backward.  
0 Viewfinder left-right positioning ring  
Use this ring to move the viewfinder sideways.  
....................................................................................................................................  
1) Safety zone marker  
The safety zone marker is a rectangle indicating the effective picture area.  
For more information, see “4-7-4 Setting the Marker Display” on page 4-74.  
2) Center marker  
The center marker indicates the center of the picture with a crosshair.  
2-16 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
qa Cameraman tally indicator  
This indicator lights while the camcorder is operating.  
Slide the window open when you shoot, keeping your eye away from the  
viewfinder. This indicator flashes when the battery level is running low  
or the tape is nearing its end.  
2
qs Viewfinder stopper  
Pull up this stopper to detach the viewfinder from the camera.  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2-17  
2
qd qf qg qh qj qk ql w;  
Shooting and recording/playback functions (2)  
qd FILTER selector  
This selector is a dual knob that selects the most appropriate filter to  
match the light source illuminating the subject. The outer knob selects  
the color temperature of the CC (Color Conversion) filter, and the inner  
knob selects the type of ND (Neutral Density) filter. The white balance is  
stored in memory for each CC filter.  
Note that if the display mode is set to 3, when this selector is adjusted,  
the new setting will be indicated on the viewfinder screen for about 3  
seconds. (e.g.: FILTER: 3)  
For detailed information on the display mode, see “4-7-3 Display Mode and  
Setting Change and Adjustment Progress Messages” on page 4-72.  
2-18 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
The relationships between the selector settings and filter selections as  
well as examples of filters for different shooting conditions are given  
below.  
2
FILTER selector (outer) setting and CC filter selection  
FILTER selector (outer) setting  
CC filter selection  
Cross filtera)  
3200K  
A
B
C
D
4300K  
6300K  
a) A type of special effect filter. Generates a cross-hair light ray on a highlighted  
portion.  
FILTER selector (inner) setting and ND filter selection  
FILTER selector (inner) setting  
ND filter selection  
Clear  
1
2
3
4
1/4 ND  
1/16 ND  
1/64 ND  
Examples of shooting conditions and appropriate filters  
Shooting condition  
CC filter  
ND filter  
Sunrise and sunset;  
inside studio  
B (3200 K)  
1 (clear)  
Clear skies  
C(4300 K) or  
D (6300 K)  
2 (1/4 ND) or  
3 (1/16 ND)  
Cloudy or raining  
D (6300 K)  
1 (clear) or  
2 (1/4 ND)  
Very bright conditions  
such as snow, at high  
altitudes, or at the seashore  
C (4300 K) or  
D (6300 K)  
3 (1/16 ND) or  
4 (1/64 ND)  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2-19  
qf SHUTTER selector  
Set this selector to ON to use the electronic shutter. Set it to SEL to  
switch the shutter speed or mode setting within the range that has been  
previously set from the setup menu.  
When this selector is adjusted, the new setting will be indicated on the  
setting change/adjustment progress message display area for about 3  
seconds.  
2
For more information about the shutter speed and mode settings, see “4-2 Setting  
the Electronic Shutter” on page 4-12.  
qg AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/black balance adjustment)  
switch  
This switch activates the white balance and black balance automatic  
adjustment functions.  
WHT: Automatic adjustment of the white balance. If the WHITE BAL  
switch is set to A or B, the white balance setting is stored in the  
corresponding memory. The memory can store the white balance  
setting for each CC filter.  
BLK: Automatic adjustment of the black set and black balance.  
qh ASSIGN (assignable) switches 1/2  
You can assign the desired functions to each of ASSIGN 1 switch (push-  
type) and ASSIGN 2 switch (slide-type) on the FUNCTION 1 page of  
the USER menu.  
For details, see “4-8-5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1/2 Switches” on page 4-  
108.  
qj GAIN selector  
This selector switches the gain of the video amplifier to match the  
lighting conditions during shooting. The gains corresponding to the L,  
M, and H settings are selected from the setup menu before use. The  
factory settings are L = 0 dB, M = 6 dB, and H = 12 dB.  
When this selector is adjusted, the new setting will be indicated on the  
2-20 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
setting change/adjustment progress message display area of the  
viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds.  
For information about setting the gain values, see “4-8-1 Setting the GAIN Selector  
Values” on page 4-97.  
2
qk OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic contrast control) selector  
This selector switches the video signal that is output to the VTR,  
viewfinder, and video monitor, between the color bar signal and the  
camera output.  
BARS: Outputs the color bar signal.  
CAM: Outputs the camera signal. It also switches DCC1) on and off  
when output from the camera is selected.  
BARS, DCC OFF  
A color bar signal is output and the DCC  
circuit does not operate. For example, use  
the setting for the following purposes.  
Adjusting the video monitor  
Recording the color bar signal  
CAM, DCC OFF  
BARS CAM  
The video signal from the camera is  
output, and the DCC circuit does not  
operate.  
OFF ON  
DCC  
CAM, DCC ON  
The video signal from the camera is  
output, and the DCC circuit operates.  
OUTPUT/DCC selector  
....................................................................................................................................  
1) DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control)  
Also called automatic knee. Against a very bright background with the iris  
opening adjusted to the subject, objects in the background will be lost in the  
glare. The DCC function will suppress the high intensity and restore much of the  
lost detail and is particularly effective in the following cases.  
Shooting a subject against a bright sky  
Shooting a subject indoors, against a background through a window  
Any high contrast scenes  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2-21  
ql WHITE BAL (white balance memory) switch  
This switch determines the source of the white balance settings.  
PRST (preset): Adjusts the color temperature corresponding to the  
position of the FILTER selector (outer knob). Use the PRST setting  
when you have no time to adjust the white balance.  
2
A or B: When the AUTO W/B BAL switch is pushed to WHT, the white  
balance is automatically adjusted according to the current position of  
the FILTER selector (outer knob), and the adjusted value is stored in  
either memory A or memory B. (There are two memories for each  
CC filter, so a total of eight adjustments can be stored.) When the  
FILTER selector (outer knob) is at the same position as it was when  
this WHITE BAL switch was adjusted, the stored value is called from  
memory, and the camcorder automatically adjusts itself to that value.  
B (ATW): When this switch is set to B whereas, on the FUNCTION 2  
page of the OPERATION menu, WHITE B CH is set to ATW1), the  
ATW is activated.  
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting will be indicated on the  
setting change/adjustment progress message display area of the  
viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds.  
You can assign the ATW ON/OFF function to the ASSIGN 1 switch  
(push-type) on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu.  
For details, see “4-8-5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1/2 Switches” on page 4-  
108.  
w; TURBO GAIN button  
When shooting under extremely poor lighting conditions, slide the cover  
of this button to the left and press the button once to boost the video gain  
to the value preset on the GAIN SW page of the USER menu (up to 42  
dB, factory setting: 42 dB). To stop boosting the gain, press the button  
once more.  
....................................................................................................................................  
1) ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)  
The white balance of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for the  
varying lighting conditions.  
2-22 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
2
wa ws wd wf wg  
Shooting and recording/playback functions (3)  
wa VBS/SDI OUT (video signal output) connector (BNC type)  
(Only when the HKDW-702 extension board (not supplied) is  
installed)  
In this manual, the illustration of the camcorder which the BNC  
connector is attached is used. If you do not install the HKDW-702,  
ignore this connector.  
This connector outputs down-converted 525i/625i signals (75-ohm  
terminated) to the video monitor. The output signal can be selected as  
analog composite or SDI. Refer to the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER  
menu. Selecting OFF stops the converter.  
For instructions on how to select the output signal, see “4-8-2 Selecting the Output  
Signals” on page 4-100.  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2-23  
Note  
The down-converted signal (analog composite/SDI signals) is delayed  
by several milliseconds, compared with the video signal recorded on  
the tape.  
When the HKDW-702 is attached to the HDW-750, the HD signal is  
down-converted to the 525i signal. When the HKDW-702 is attached  
to the HDW-750CE, the HD signal is down-converted to the 625i  
signal.  
2
ws HD SDI OUT (HD SDI output) connector (BNC type)  
This connector outputs the HD SDI signal to the video monitor.  
For instructions on how to select whether or not the signal is output from  
this connector (ON/OFF), refer to the OUTPUT SEL page of the USER  
menu.  
For details, see “4-8-2 Selecting the Output Signals” on page 4-100.  
wd REMOTE (remote control) connector (8-pin)  
Connect the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit (not supplied), which makes  
VTR control possible.  
wf TEST OUT (test output) connector (BNC type)  
This connector outputs the HD-Y (black and white) signal.  
When the HKDW-702 extension board (not supplied) is installed, the  
output signal can be selected as a down-converted analog composite  
(color) or HD-Y signal on the OUTPUT SEL page of the USER menu.  
Depending on the internal board and menu settings, the menu, time code,  
and shot data can be displayed over the image on the monitor. You can  
use this connector to synchronize the time code of an external VTR to  
the time code of the camcorder.  
For instructions on how to select the test output signal when the HKDW-702 is  
installed, see “4-8-2 Selecting the Output Signals” on page 4-100.  
2-24 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
wg GENLOCK IN (genlock input) connector (BNC type)  
This connector inputs an HD reference signal when the camera is to be  
genlocked or when the time code is to be synchronized with external  
equipment. Use the MAINTENANCE menu to adjust the genlock H-  
phase (phase of Horizontal sync signal).  
2
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
This connector also inputs the NTSC/PAL composite video signal as the  
reference signal when the time code is to be synchronized with external  
equipment. In this case, the genlock H-phase cannot be adjusted. Beyond  
that, the subcarrier of the down-converted signal (composite video  
signal) cannot be synchronized with external equipment when the  
HKDW-702 (not supplied) is installed.  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2-25  
2
wh  
wj  
wk  
wl  
e;  
ea  
es  
D
FW  
F
REW  
STOP  
PLAY  
EJECT  
Opening the cover  
2
1
Press on the tab.  
Shooting and recording/playback functions (4)  
wh VTR START button  
Press this button to start recording. Press it again to stop recording. The  
effect is exactly the same as that of the VTR button on the lens.  
When the REC BUTTON function is assigned to the ASSIGN 1 (push  
type), you can use the ASSIGN 1 switch as the VTR START button.  
2-26 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
wj VTR SAVE/STBY (VTR power saving/standby) switch  
This switch controls the VTR power mode during pauses in recording  
(REC PAUSE).  
SAVE: Power saving mode. When you press the VTR START button,  
there is a short delay before recording starts, but power consumption  
is less than in standby mode, and battery life is extended. When the  
switch is set to SAVE, the VTR SAVE indicator in the viewfinder  
lights.  
2
STBY: Standby mode. Recording starts as soon as you press the VTR  
START button. Avoid allowing the camcorder to remain in STBY  
(standby) mode for a long time.  
wk EJECT (cassette eject) button  
Press this button to eject or load a cassette.  
wl REW (rewind) button and indicator  
Press this button to rewind the tape. The indicator lights during  
rewinding.  
e; F FWD (fast forward) button and indicator  
Press this button to fast forward the tape. The indicator lights during fast  
forward.  
ea PLAY (playback) button and indicator  
Press this button to view the recorded picture in the viewfinder or on the  
color video monitor. The indicator lights during playback.  
The 4 times normal speed search function is provided to make it far  
quicker to find a desired location of the tape. Press the REW button or F  
FWD button during playback to view the 4 times normal speed search  
picture.  
es STOP button  
Press this button to stop the tape.  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2-27  
2-5 Menu Operating Section  
2
1
2
4
CANCEL/PRST  
OFF  
ON/SEL  
ON  
ESCAPE  
MENU  
5
3
STATUS  
OFF  
Menu operating section  
2-28 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
1 Memory stick compartment  
2
MEMORY STICK OPEN button  
EJECT button  
Memory stick  
Open the cover of the memory stick compartment by pressing the  
MEMORY STICK OPEN button. Insert the memory stick (not supplied)  
with the notch facing downward and the label facing toward you into the  
slot.  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2-29  
2 MENU knob  
Use this knob to change the page selection or a setting within the menu.  
Push: If you push this knob when the arrow (t) is placed at the page  
title on the menu, the arrow (t) changes to the question mark (?)  
and you can change the page.  
2
When the arrow mark is placed at the position other than the page  
title, the camcorder turns in mode where you can change the settings  
by pushing this knob.  
Turn: Turn this knob to change the page or change the settings of the  
items.  
3 STATUS ON/SEL / OFF (menu display on/paging/display off)  
switch  
To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
ON/SEL: Each time this switch is pushed upward, the window to  
confirm the menu settings and conditions of the camcorder is  
displayed on the viewfinder screen. There are three windows, which  
are switched each time the switch is pushed upward. Each window is  
displayed for about 10 seconds.  
OFF: To clear the page immediately after display, push this switch down  
to the OFF position.  
You can select the confirmation window to be displayed on the  
menu.  
For details, see Display/dont display status confirmation windowson page 4-  
91.  
2-30 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
4 MENU ON/OFF (menu display) switch  
To use this switch, open the cover.  
This switch is used to display the menu on the viewfinder screen or the  
test signal screen. Closing the cover results in automatically setting this  
switch to OFF.  
ON: Displays the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test signal  
screen, at the page which was on the screen when the previous menu  
access ended. (When the menu is first used, the first page is  
displayed.)  
2
OFF: Removes the menu from the viewfinder screen or the test signal  
screen.  
5 CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE (menu setting cancellation/menu  
presetting/returning page) switch  
To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
CANCEL/PRST: Pushing this switch up to this position displays the  
message to confirm whether the previous settings are cancelled or  
settings are reset to their initial values, depending on the menu  
operating condition.  
Pushing this switch up to this position again cancels the previous  
settings or resets the settings to their initial values.  
ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page, which has a hierarchical  
structure, is opened. Each time the switch is pushed to this position,  
the page returns to one stage higher in the hierarchy.  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2-31  
2-6 Time Code System  
2
1
2
3
Time code functions (1)  
1 GENLOCK IN (genlock input) connector (BNC type)  
This connector inputs an HD reference signal when the camera is to be  
genlocked or when the time code is to be synchronized with external  
equipment.  
This connector can input an NTSC/PAL analog composite signal as the  
reference video signal when the time code is to be synchronized with  
external equipment.  
2-32 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
This connector also inputs a return video signal. You can display the  
image of the return video signal in the viewfinder screen when you set  
the RETURN VIDEO to ON on the GENLOCK page of the  
OPERATION menu.  
You can assign the RETURN VIDEO function to ASSIGN 1 switch.  
For details, see 4-8-5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1/2 Switcheson page 4-  
2
108.  
2 TC IN (time code input) connector (BNC type)  
To synchronize the time code with an external time code, connect the  
reference time code input here.  
3 TC OUT (time code output) connector (BNC type)  
To synchronize the time code of an external VTR with that of the  
camcorder, connect this connector to the time code input lock connector  
of the external VTR.  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2-33  
2
CTL TC DATA  
DISPLAY  
OFF ON  
LIGHT  
4
5
6
HOLD  
RESET  
WARNING  
ADVANCE  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
LEVEL  
7
8
CH-3  
CH-4  
0
10  
0
10  
F
R
F-RUN  
REGEN  
CLOCK  
SET  
AUTO  
R-RUN  
W
MANUAL  
9
q;  
MEMORY STICK  
OPEN  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CUE IN  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
AUDIO IN  
DATA DISPLAY  
FRONT  
REAR  
WIRELESS  
F
R
W
U-BIT  
TIME  
SHOT  
NO  
qa  
Time code functions (2)  
2-34 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
4 HOLD (display hold) button  
Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data displayed in the  
counter display section. (The time code generator continues normal  
operation.) Pressing this button again releases the hold. One use of this  
feature is to determine the exact time of a particular shot.  
When the HOLD button is activated, the time data is displayed in the  
following format:  
2
See 2-8 Warnings and Indications on the Display Panelon page 2-41 for more  
information about the counter display.  
5 RESET (counter reset) button  
This button resets the time data displayed on the counter display section  
to 00:00:00:00and the user bit data to 00000000".  
6 DISPLAY (LCD) switch  
CTL: Control signal  
TC: Time code  
DATA: The item selected by the DATA DISPLAY switch.  
For more information, see Time code displayson page 2-43.  
7 ADVANCE button  
For setting the time code, user bits, or real time, each press of this button  
increments the flashing digit selected by the SHIFT button.  
8 SHIFT button  
For setting the time code, user bits, or real time, this button selects the  
digit to be changed. The selected digit flashes.  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2-35  
9 PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK (preset/regeneration/clock) switch  
This switch selects whether to set a new time code or to match the  
existing time code that had been recorded.  
PRESET: Starts recording time code values on the tape from the newly  
set value.  
2
REGEN: Reads the existing time code on the tape and sets the time code  
starting value accordingly. Thus, even when there is an indefinite  
break in recording, this setting ensures that time codes on the tape  
will be continuous. Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-  
RUN switch, the camcorder operates in R-RUN mode.  
CLOCK: Makes the time code value coincide with the built-in clock.  
Regardless of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch setting, the camcorder  
always operates in F-RUN mode.  
For more information, see To make the time code continuouson page 4-36.  
0 F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/recording run) switch  
This switch selects the operating mode for the internal time code  
generator.  
F-RUN: The time code generator keeps running, regardless of the  
operation state of the VTR. Use this position when matching the time  
code to real time or for synchronizing the time code with an external  
time code.  
SET: Set the switch to this position to set the time code or user bits.  
R-RUN: The time code generator runs only while recording. This  
produces a tape with consecutive time code value, even when shot  
intermittently.  
For more information, see 4-5-3 Setting the User Bitson page 4-37 and 4-5-1  
Setting the Time Codeon page 4-34.  
2-36 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
qa DATA DISPLAY switch  
U-BIT: Display the user bit value.  
SHOT-TIME: Display the date and time from the shot data.  
SHOT-NO: Display the shot number from the shot data.  
2
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2-37  
2-7 Warnings and Indications  
The camcorder supplies you visual information and warnings by means  
of its indicators without you having to use the speaker, earphone or  
viewfinder.  
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Warning and indication functions  
2-38 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
1 TALLY indicator  
Setting the TALLY switch to HIGH or LOW activates this indicator. The  
indicator lights during recording on the VTR. It also provides the same  
information as the REC indicator in the viewfinder; it lights up during  
recording and flashes to indicate a problem. The brightness of this  
indicator when it is lit can be controlled by the TALLY switch.  
2
2 DISPLAY/ASPECT (display/aspect control) switch  
Use this switch to turn the markers on or off and to change the  
viewfinder screen aspect ratio.  
DISPLAY: When the MARKER is set to ON on the MARKER 1 page  
of the USER menu, pushing this switch to DISPLAY toggles the  
markers on the viewfinder screen on and off.  
Even if the DISPLAY switch is set to OFF, the USER menu appears  
by setting the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to ON.  
ASPECT: Pushing this witch to ASPECT toggles the viewfinder screen  
aspect ratio between 16 : 9 and 4 : 3.  
For details, see 4-7-4 Setting the Marker Displayon page 4-74.  
3 TALLY switch  
This switch controls the TALLY indicator, setting its brightness (HIGH  
or LOW) or turning it off.  
HIGH: The TALLY indicator gets brighter.  
OFF: The TALLY indicator does not operate.  
LOW: The TALLY indicator gets dimmer.  
4 BACK TALLY indicator  
This indicator is identical to the TALLY indicator 1 when the BACK  
TALLY switch 5 is set to ON. (This indicator may not work in the  
same manner as the TALLY indicator 1 according to a certain  
condition.)  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2-39  
5 BACK TALLY switch  
This switch turns the BACK TALLY and the REAR TALLY indicators  
on and off.  
ON: Switches on the BACK TALLY and REAR TALLY indicators.  
OFF: Switches off the BACK TALLY and REAR TALLY indicators.  
2
6 LIGHT switch  
This switch controls the display panel light.  
ON: Turns the panel light on.  
OFF: Turns the panel light off.  
7 WARNING indicator  
This indicator lights up or flashes when there is a fault in the VTR.  
See 6-3 Operation Warningson page 6-16 for more information about the  
relationships between the operation of the indicator and the meanings of the  
indications.  
8 Display panel  
VTR error messages, battery status, tape status, audio level, time data,  
and so forth are displayed on this panel.  
For more information, see 2-8 Warnings and Indications on the Display Panel”  
on page 2-41.  
9 REAR TALLY indicator  
This indicator is identical to the BACK TALLY indicator 4 when the  
BACK TALLY switch is set to ON.  
2-40 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
2-8 Warnings and Indications  
on the Display Panel  
Tape status, battery status, and level indicators  
2
Audio channel level meter: When the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch is  
set to CH-1/2, the audio channel level 1 is displayed.  
When the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch is set to CH-3/4, the audio  
channel level 3 is displayed.  
Audio channel level meter:  
When the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4  
switch is set to CH-1/2, the  
audio channel level 2 is  
displayed.  
When the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4  
switch is set to CH-3/4, the  
audio channel level 4 is  
displayed.  
OVER EMPH OVER  
PB VITC NDF EXT-LK  
HOLD  
0
V
H
10  
20  
H
MIN  
SEC  
FRM  
TAPE  
E
E
B
30  
40  
BATT  
RF  
F
SERVO  
HUMID  
SLACK  
PEAK dB  
Battery status indicator  
BATT  
E
F
Fully charged  
Nearly dead: BATTflashes.  
Dead battery (battery must be charged):  
BATTand Eflash.  
Tape status indicator  
TAPE  
E
B
Full (at beginning)  
Close to end: TAPEflashes.  
End (tape must be replaced):  
TAPEand Eflash.  
Tape status, battery status, and level indicators  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2-41  
VTR operation and status indicators  
Lights during playback.  
2
OVER EMPH OVER  
PB VITC NDF EXT-LK  
HOLD  
0
10  
H
MIN  
SEC  
FRM  
20  
TAPE  
E
E
B
30  
40  
BATT  
RF  
F
SERVO  
HUMID  
SLACK  
PEAK dB  
Warning indicators  
RF: Lights if the recording heads are clogged.  
SERVO: Lights if the servo motor fails.  
HUMID: Lights if condensation is on the drum.  
SLACK: Lights if the tape is not winding properly.  
For more information, see 6-3 Operation Warningson page 6-16.  
VTR operation and status indicators  
Note  
If the tape in the VTR becomes slackened, an error code appears  
automatically on the display section of the display panel.  
For more information refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
2-42 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
Time code displays  
Lights in playback mode.  
2
Lights when VITC is selected for the time code.  
Lights in non-drop frame mode. (HDW-750 only)  
Lights when the camcorder is synchronized with  
an external time code.  
Lights when the time code  
generator is on hold.  
OVER EMPH OVER  
PB VITC NDF EXT-LK  
HOLD  
0
V
H
10  
20  
H
MIN  
SEC  
FRM  
TAPE  
E
E
B
30  
40  
BATT  
RF  
F
SERVO  
HUMID  
SLACK  
PEAK dB  
Lights when the time code, CTL, or  
real time is displayed.  
Lights in the following way when the HOLD button  
is pressed.  
Time counter display: Shows the time code, CTL, user bits,  
and real time.  
The table on the next page lists the details of the displayed  
items and switch settings.  
Time code displays  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2-43  
Relationships between the DISPLAY switch and DATA  
DISPLAY switch settings and the time counter displays  
Except during setting of the time code, the time counter display is  
determined by the position of the DISPLAY switch and DATA  
DISPLAY switch.  
2
For details of setting the time code menu operation, see 4-5-1 Setting the Time  
Codeon page 4-34.  
Switch settings related to time code and displayed information  
DISPLAY  
DATA DISPLAY  
Displayed  
switch position switch position  
information  
CTL  
TC  
Any position  
Any position  
U-BIT  
CTL  
Time code  
DATA  
User bits  
SHOT-TIME  
SHOT-NO.  
Data and time from shot data  
Shot number from shot data  
2-44 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
2-9 Indicators on the  
Viewfinder  
1
2
2
3
TALLY/REC  
BATT  
Viewefinder  
screen  
4
5
VTR  
SAVE  
Indicators on the Viewfinder  
1 TALLY indicator  
This indicator lights when the camcorder is in Loop Rec mode. Also, this  
indicator blinks when the camcorder is in auto Interval Rec mode or  
manual Interval Rec mode.  
2 REC (recording) indicator  
This indicator lights in red during recording. It also warns by flashing.  
For more information, see 6-3 Operation Warningson page 6-16.  
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2-45  
3 BATT (battery) indicator  
This indicator starts flashing when the battery connected to the  
camcorder has fallen, and stays lit when the battery is exhausted.  
To prevent interruption during operation, replace the battery as soon as  
this indicator starts flashing.  
2
The level at which the indicator starts flashing can be set on the  
BATTERY page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
For details, see the Maintenance Manual.  
6
(warning) indicator  
This indicator lights up when the camcorder is used under one or more of  
the following conditions and if the corresponding items have been set to  
ON on the !LED page of the USER menu.  
The gain is set to anything but 0 dB.  
The SHUTTER selector is ON.  
The WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.  
ATW is being used.  
The lens extender is used.  
The FILTER selector is set to anything but ND:1/CC:A.  
The reference value of the auto iris adjustment is anything but the  
standard value.  
5 VTR SAVE indicator  
Lights up when the VTR section is set to power save mode by setting the  
VTR SAVE/STBY switch to SAVE.  
2-46 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls  
3-1 About Cassettes  
This section describes the procedure for loading and unloading a  
cassette.  
See Specifications VTR Section (page A-3) for information about the cassettes  
you can use in the camcorder.  
3-1-1 Loading and Unloading a Cassette  
Loading a cassette  
3
1
Turn on the POWER switch.  
POWER switch  
HUMID display  
Note  
If the interior of the VTR section is damp, the HUMID indicator will  
light. If this happens, wait until the indicator goes off before going  
on to step 2.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
3-1  
2
Press the EJECT button.  
The cassette lid will open.  
Cassette lid  
3
3
Check that there is no slack in the tape. Then slide in the cassette  
until it clicks into position and close the cassette lid completely by  
pressing near the engraved PUSH".  
Insert the cassette.  
1
Window  
outward.  
Cassette holder  
2
Push and close the  
cassette lid.  
3-2  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
Notes  
To insert the tape correctly, make sure to stand the grip of the  
camcorder.  
When inserting the tape, be careful that you dont hit the tape against  
the tape holder.  
Checking the tape for slack  
Pressing in the reels lightly, turn them gently with your fingers in the  
3
directions shown below. If the reels will not move, there is no slack.  
Checking the tape for slack  
Unloading a cassette  
With the power supply on, press the EJECT button to open the cassette  
lid. Then take out the cassette. If you are not going to insert another  
cassette, close the cassette lid.  
It is possible to take out the cassette and close the cassette lid unless the  
battery voltage drops below about 10.5 V. Do not repeat this unloading  
operation.  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
3-3  
Unloading a cassette manually  
If the battery voltage drops below about 10.5 V, take out the cassette  
manually as illustrated below.  
3
Cassette lid  
1 Turn the power off.  
2 Open this rubber cover.  
3 Pushing on the screw inside  
with a screwdriver, turn  
the screw clockwise until the  
cassette lid opens.  
Unloading a cassette manually  
You need not return the screw to its original position after taking out the  
cassette. Although the cassette lid is not locked, turning on the power  
makes the cassette lid operable again.  
3-4  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
3-1-2 Preventing Accidental Erasure  
The following procedure prevents cassettes from being recorded  
inadvertently.  
3
Push the plug in. To  
reuse the cassette,  
return the plug to its  
original position.  
Preventing accidental erasure  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
3-5  
3-2 Recording  
3-2-1 Basic Procedure  
This section describes the basic procedure for shooting and recording.  
Before a shooting session, ensure that the camcorder is functioning  
properly.  
For more information, see 6-1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shootingon page  
6-1.  
3
Turning on the camcorder and loading a cassette  
Follow the procedure below.  
3
4
1
2
2
Basic procedure for shooting : from power supply to cassette loading  
1
Attach a fully charged battery pack.  
For details, see 5-1 Power Supplyon page 5-1.  
3-6  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
2
Set the POWER switch to ON. Check that the HUMID indicator  
does not appear and that the BATT indicator shows at least five  
segments.  
If HUMID indicator appears, wait until it disappears.  
Note  
After turning off the power, check whether the drum is dry (even if  
the HUMID indicator is off) when the turning on the power again.  
If the BATT indicator does not show at least five segments,  
replace the battery pack with a fully charged one.  
3
3
4
Check that there are no obstructions near the cassette lid. Then press  
the EJECT button to open the cassette lid.  
After checking the points below, load the cassette and close the  
cassette lid.  
The cassette is not write-protected.  
There is no slack in the tape.  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
3-7  
Basic procedure for shooting: from adjusting the  
black balance and white balance to stopping recording  
After turning on the power and loading a cassette, set the switches and  
selectors as shown below and begin operation.  
DISPLAY: ON  
3
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-1/CH-2:  
AUTO  
Iris:  
Automatic  
Zoom:  
Automatic  
OUTPUT/DCC:  
CAM, DCC ON  
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN:  
F-RUN or R-RUN  
(set as needed)  
Switch and selector settings before shooting  
3-8  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
Shooting  
Follow the procedure below.  
1,2  
2
3,5  
3
4
5,6  
Basic procedure for shooting: from adjusting the black balance and white  
balance to stopping recording  
1
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLK to adjust the black  
balance.  
For detailed information on how to adjust the black balance, see 4-1-1  
Adjusting the Black Balanceon page 4-2.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
3-9  
2
Select the CC filter and ND filter to match the lighting conditions,  
and adjust the white balance.  
When the black balance and white balance settings are already  
in memory:  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to A or B.  
3
When the white balance setting is not in memory and you do not  
have enough time to adjust the white balance:  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to the PRST position. The white  
balance is automatically set to 3200 K when the FILTER selector is  
set to B, to 4300 K when the FILTER selector is set to C, and to  
6300 K when the FILTER selector is set to D.  
For more information, see 4-1-2 Adjusting the White Balance”  
on page 4-6.  
3
4
Aim the camera at the subject and adjust the focus and zoom.  
If necessary, set the electronic shutter for an appropriate mode and  
speed.  
For more information, see 4-2 Setting the Electronic Shutter”  
on page 4-12.  
5
To start recording, press the VTR START button or the VTR button  
on the lens.  
Or if the REC BUTTON function is assigned to the ASSIGN 1  
switch, this switch functions as VTR START/STOP buttons.  
For details, see 4-8-5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1/2 Switcheson page  
4-108.  
During recording, the REC indicator in the viewfinder goes on.  
Perform zooming and focus control, if necessary.  
3-10 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
6
To stop recording, press the VTR START button or the VTR button  
on the lens again.  
The REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off.  
Cassette control buttons  
During recording, the cassette control buttons (EJECT, REW, F FWD,  
PLAY, STOP) have no effect.  
3
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-11  
3-2-2 Continuous Recording  
If the camcorder is in the recording pause mode, simply pressing the  
VTR START button on the camcorder or the VTR button on the lens  
continues recording at exactly the next frame.  
In other cases, you first need to position the tape at an appropriate point.  
3
When the camcorder is in the recording pause mode  
Pressing the VTR START button on the camcorder or the VTR button on  
the lens positions the tape at the appropriate point automatically.  
However, the time taken before recording starts depends on the setting of  
the VTR SAVE/STBY switch.  
If the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is in the SAVE position, it takes about  
4 seconds before recording starts.  
If the VTR SAVE/STBY switch is in the STBY position, recording  
starts immediately. However, just after the switch position is changed  
from SAVE to STBY, it takes about 4 seconds before recording starts.  
3-12 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
If you turn off the power during a recording pause  
2
3
1
3
Continuous recording after turning off the power during a recording pause  
1
2
Turn on the power again.  
Press the RET button on the lens.  
The camcorder positions the tape at the appropriate point. Note,  
however, that this function works only for continuously recorded  
material or consecutively joined segments totaling at least 3 seconds  
in length.  
3
Press the VTR START button on the camcorder or the VTR button  
on the lens to start recording.  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-13  
Continuous recording in other cases  
After rewinding or fast forward, after removing the cassette, or on a tape  
that has been partially recorded, you can obtain a continuous recording  
by following the procedure below.  
The End Search function also allows you to continue recording on the  
partially recorded tape.  
3
For details, see 3-2-8 Searching for the Last Recorded Portion and Turning in the  
Recording Pause Mode (End Search Function)on page 3-45.  
1,2  
3
4
Continuous recording after rewinding or fast forward, after removing the  
cassette, or on a tape that has been partly recorded  
1
2
Looking in the viewfinder, press the PLAY button to start playback.  
Press the STOP button at the desired point to begin recording. To  
continue from the end of recording already on the tape, press the  
STOP button immediately after the end of the previous recording  
(within 0.5 seconds).  
3
4
Press the RET button.  
The tape will rewind and will be positioned at the desired point to  
continue recording.  
Press the VTR START button on the camcorder or the VTR button  
on the lens to start recording.  
3-14 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
3-2-3 Recording Good Shot Markers  
Good shot markers 1 and 2 are recorded to tape when the RET button on  
the lens is pressed during recording.  
Recording shot markers1) 1 and 2 for scenes containing important  
images and sounds enables quick access to the marked points. This  
increases editing efficiency.  
3
For detailed information on shot marker operations, refer to the manual supplied  
with your VTR.  
A setting on the VTR MODE 5 page of the MAINTENANCE menu  
determines whether or not good shot markers are recorded.  
Recording markers to the tape  
The VTR MODE 5 page of the MAINTENANCE menu allows you to  
decide whether or not markers such as good shot markers and/or  
recording start markers are recorded to the tape.  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while pushing the MENU  
knob .  
The TOP menu appears.  
<TOP MENU>  
,USER  
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
ALL  
OPERATION  
PAINT  
MANTENANCE  
FILE  
DIAGNOSIS  
(Continued)  
....................................................................................................................................  
1) Shot marker  
Time code of the scene to be used as the editing point when editing.  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-15  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to MAINTENANCE.  
Push the MENU knob.  
When the MAINTENANCE menu is first used, the CONTENTS  
page appears.  
Or if you have used the MAINTENANCE menu already, the page  
that was on the screen when the last FILE menu operation ended  
appears on the viewfinder screen.  
3
4
When the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU knob to  
move the t mark to VTR MODE 5, then push the MENU knob.  
The VTR MODE 5 page appears.  
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to LTC UB-MARKER.  
3-16 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
6
7
Push the MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of LTC UB-MARKER changes to the z  
mark and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the  
desired setting appears.  
3
The setting changes in order of SET y ALL y OFF.  
Item  
Contents  
SET  
Determines whether or not markers are recorded for the  
items REC START MARK, SHOT MARKER 1 and  
SHOT MARKER 2 which appear when you select SET.  
ALL  
Records the recording start markers, good shot marker  
1 and good shot maker 2.  
OFF  
Does not record any markers.  
When you select SET, go to step 8.  
When you select ALL or OFF, go to step 9.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-17  
8
Set the marker(s) to be recorded to ON.  
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the marker to be  
set.  
3
2
3
Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counter clockwise until the  
desired setting appears.  
To record the marker to the tape, select ON.  
To not record the marker, select OFF.  
Perform settings of the remaining markers repeating steps 1 and  
2.  
9
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF to end the menu operation.  
Recording a shot marker 1  
Press the RET button once. On the viewfinder screen, zand the time  
code of the marked point are displayed for about 3 seconds.  
Recording a shot marker 2  
Press the RET button twice. On the viewfinder screen, Xand the time  
code of the marked point are displayed for about 3 seconds.  
3-18 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
3-2-4 Recording a Recording Start Marker  
You can record a recording start marker at the beginning of the  
recording.  
Using recording start markers enables quick access to the marked points,  
for efficient editing.  
For detailed information on recording start marker operations, refer to the manual  
supplied with your VTR.  
3
You can set whether or not recording start markers are recorded using  
the VTR MODE 5 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
For detailed information on setting whether or not recording start markers are  
recorded, see Recording markers to the tapeon page 3-15.  
3-2-5 Starting a Shoot with a Few Seconds of  
Pre-Stored Picture Data (Loop Rec  
Function) (When Using an HKDW-703  
Extension Board)  
By installing the optional HKDW-703 extension board (not supplied) in  
the camcorder, the camcorder is able to constantly store a few seconds  
(up to 7 seconds for the 59.94I format model or up to 8 seconds for the  
50I format model) worth of the most current picture and sound data in  
the boards memory.  
Thus, when you press the VTR START button or the VTR button on the  
lens, the recording starts with the data stored a few seconds before.  
Setting the Loop Rec time/Loop Rec mode  
To record in Loop Rec mode, you need to turn on Loop Rec mode and  
set the picture data storage time (Loop Rec time) using the USER menu.  
Loop Rec time  
The Loop Rec time and VTR SAVE/STBY switch settings determine the  
number of seconds of picture data that will be stored in the HKDW-  
703s memory and recorded when you press the VTR START button or  
VTR button on the lens.  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-19  
The following table shows the approximate number of seconds worth of  
picture data (counting back from the time you begin recording) that will  
be recorded from memory. However, when changing from SAVE to  
STBY, or under the special situations explained in the notes on this page,  
the actual amount of data recorded may be shorter.  
Loop Rec time setting and recording start point  
3
Loop Rec time VTR STBY mode  
VTR SAVE mode  
7 (seconds)  
About 7 seconds before  
About 4 seconds before  
(for 59.94I format)  
8 (seconds)  
(for 50I format)  
About 8 seconds before  
About 6 seconds before  
About 5 seconds before  
6 (seconds)  
5 (seconds)  
About 4 seconds before (for  
59.94I format)  
About 5 seconds before (for  
50I format)  
About 5 seconds before  
About 4 seconds before (for  
59.94I format)  
About 5 seconds before (for  
50I format)  
4 (seconds)  
3 (seconds)  
2 (seconds)  
1 (seconds)  
0 (seconds)  
About 4 seconds before  
About 3 seconds before  
About 2 seconds before  
About 1 seconds before  
About 0 seconds before  
About 4 seconds before  
About 3 seconds before  
About 2 seconds before  
About 1 seconds before  
About 0 seconds before  
Notes  
After selecting the Loop Rec mode, immediately changing the Loop  
Rec time or performing playback or recording review, the picture data  
stored in memory before this operation are made to be unrecordable.  
This means that when you press the VTR START button or VTR  
button on the lens, the previously stored picture data will not be  
recorded.  
3-20 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
During playback or recording review, the picture data is not stored in  
the HKDW-703s memory. Picture data corresponding to the duration  
of playback or recording review will not be in memory and will not be  
recorded to tape.  
To set the Loop Rec mode  
Follow the procedure below to turn Loop Rec mode on.  
3
MENU ON/OFF switch  
MENU knob  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The page that was on the viewfinder screen when the last menu  
operation ended will appear again.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-21  
2
3
4
Turn the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page appears.  
When the question mark  
appears at the left of the  
title page, you can  
switch the pages.  
Turn the MENU knob  
clockwise or  
counterclockwise to  
display the desired  
page.  
3
The DF/NDF item on the FUNCTION 1 page appears only for the  
59.94I format model.  
In this manual, menu operation is explained using the menus of the  
59.94I format model.  
Push the MENU knob.  
The t mark appears at the left of the currently selected item and  
the z mark appears at the left of the setting.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to LOOP/INTVAL  
REC.  
3-22 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
5
Push the MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of LOOP/INTVAL REC changes to the z  
mark and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
3
6
Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until LOOP  
appears.  
If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise, the  
setting changes in order of OFF y LOOP y A INT y M INT.  
When LOOP appears, the camcorder is in the Loop Rec mode where  
picture, sound, and time code are constantly saved in memory. The  
TALLY lamp (green tally) is on while the picture data is being  
stored in the memory.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-23  
7
8
Push the MENU knob.  
The z mark at the left of LOOP/INTVAL REC changes to the t  
mark and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z mark.  
In this case, you can select another item.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to LOOP REC TIME.  
3
9
Push the MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of LOOP REC TIME changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
10 Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the  
desired Loop Rec time appears.  
If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise, the  
Loop Rec time changes in order of 0 SEC y 1 SEC y 2 SEC  
y 3 SEC y 4 SEC y 5 SEC y 6 SEC y 7 SEC (for 59.94I)  
/8 SEC (for 50 I).  
11 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF to end the menu operation.  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen and the display  
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top  
and bottom of the viewfinder.  
3-24 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
Settings made in Loop Rec mode are maintained until changed.  
You can turn the Loop Rec mode on and off by pressing the ASSIGN 1/  
2 switch(es) to which the LOOP REC ON/OFF function is assigned.  
For detailed information on the ASSIGN 1/2 switches, see 4-8-5 Assigning  
Functions to ASSIGN 1/2 Switcheson page 4-108.  
3
Note  
You can change the Loop Rec mode menu settings while recording; any  
changes that you make, however, do not take effect until after the  
recording operation is completed.  
Camcorder operations in Loop Rec mode  
The recording procedure in Loop Rec mode is basically the same as that  
for normal recording. Please note, however, the following differences.  
When you record in Loop Rec mode, the picture you shoot is recorded  
to tape after the Loop Rec time elapses. For this reason, the tape does  
not stop immediately when you press the STOP button. After the  
STOP button is pressed, the REC lamp in the viewfinder begins  
flashing once every second and all tape operation buttons (EJECT,  
REW, F FWD, PLAY, and STOP) stop functioning until the Loop  
Rec time has elapsed. During this time, if you press the VTR START  
button or VTR button on the lens, the recording starts again as if there  
were no pause in recording  
The time the tape stops after the STOP button is pressed equals the  
Loop Rec time set. However, if you start recording within the set Loop  
Rec time immediately after selecting the Loop Rec mode, changing  
the Loop Rec time or performing playback or recording review, the  
picture data for the duration of the Loop Rec time will not be stored in  
memory. Thus, the time the tape stops after the STOP button is  
pressed becomes shorter than the Loop Rec time.  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-25  
The time code stops advancing while time data is being set (when the  
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to SET). For this reason, if you start  
recording immediately after switching to F-RUN or R-RUN (i.e., to a  
position other than SET), you may overwrite a portion of the  
previously recorded time code.  
Turning off the camera  
3
When the power is turned off during recording, the camera will switch  
off by itself after the tape has run for a few seconds.  
If you remove the battery, pull out the DC cable, or cut power to the  
AC adaptor during recording, recording of picture data ends the instant  
the tape is stopped. The recorded picture data is interrupted before the  
recording stop point. For this reason, make sure you do not change the  
battery while recording.  
When the tape runs out during recording  
Please note that picture data at the instant the tape stopped is not  
recorded if the tape runs out and the camcorder stops. The recorded  
picture data is interrupted before the recording stop point.  
3-26 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
3-2-6 Shooting Pictures at Intervals (Interval Rec  
Function) (When Using the HKDW-703)  
Inserting the optional HKDW-703 extension board (not supplied) in the  
camcorder, enables the camcorder to record pictures intermittently.  
There are two kinds of Interval Rec modes: auto Interval Rec mode and  
manual Interval Rec mode.  
In auto Interval Rec mode, pictures are automatically shot a frame at a  
time at the specified interval and stored in memory. When up to 150  
frames are stored in memory, the camcorder records them to tape. To use  
this function you need to set the total time for shooting (TAKE TOTAL  
TIME) and the time to be recorded on the tape (REC TIME) on the  
FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu. Also, by setting the PRE-  
LIGHTING function to ON, the light connected to the LIGHT connector  
automatically turns on before starting recording. This allows you to  
record pictures under the stable light condition.  
3
In manual Interval Rec mode, setting the number of frames to be  
recorded at one shooting (NUMBER OF FRAME) enables the  
camcorder to record the picture of the number of frames set each time  
the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens is pressed.  
Setting the auto Interval Rec  
To record in auto Interval Rec mode, you need to turn on auto Interval  
Rec and set the total time from starting to finishing shooting (TAKE  
TOTAL TIME) and time to be recorded on the tape (REC TIME), using  
the USER menu.  
Note  
To make settings for auto Interval Rec mode, set TAKE TOTAL TIME  
first, then REC TIME.  
To turn on the light automatically before starting recording by setting  
the PRE-LIGHTING item to ON, be sure to set the LIGHT switch to  
AUTO.  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-27  
Follow the procedure below to turn on auto Interval Rec mode  
3
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
Switches to be used for setting the auto Interval Rec mode  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The page that was on the viewfinder screen when the last menu  
operation ended will appear again.  
Turn the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page appears.  
When a question mark  
appears at the left of the  
title page, you can  
switch the pages.  
Turn the MENU knob  
clockwise or  
counterclockwise to  
display the desired  
page.  
The DF/NDF item on the FUNCTION 1 page appears only for the  
59.94I format model.  
In this manual, menu operation is explained using the menus of the  
59.94I format model.  
3-28 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
3
Push the MENU knob.  
The t mark appears at the left of the currently selected item and  
the z mark appears at the left of the setting.  
3
4
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to LOOP/INTVAL  
REC.  
Push the MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of LOOP/INTVAL REC changes to the z  
mark and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-29  
6
Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until A INT  
appears.  
If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise, the  
setting changes in order of OFF y LOOP y A INT y M INT.  
When A INT appears, the camcorder is in auto Interval Rec mode.  
The TALLY indicator (green tally) flashes (one flash/second) while  
the camcorder is in this mode. Also, TAKE TOTAL TIME and REC  
TIME appear.  
3
7
8
Push the MENU knob.  
The z mark at the left of LOOP/INTVAL REC changes to the t  
mark and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z mark.  
In this case, you can select another item.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to TAKE TOTAL  
TIME.  
3-30 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
9
Push the MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of TAKE TOTAL TIME changes to the z  
mark and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
10 Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the  
desired TAKE TOTAL TIME appears.  
3
If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise, TAKE  
TOTAL TIME changes in order of 5M y 10M y 15M y 20M  
y 30M y 40M y 50M y 1H y 2H y 3H y 4H y  
5H y 7H y 10H y 15H y 20H y 30H y 40H y 50H  
y 70H y 100H.  
where M means minutes (5M is 5 minutes) and H means hours (1H  
is one hour).  
11 Push the MENU knob.  
The ? mark at the left of setting changes to the z mark and the z  
mark at the left of TAKE TOTAL TIME changes to the t mark.  
12 Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to REC TIME.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-31  
13 Push the MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of REC TIME changes to the z mark and  
the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the question mark.  
14 Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the  
desired time to be recorded on the tape appears.  
3
If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise, the  
Loop Rec time changes in order of 5 SEC y 10SEC y 15SEC  
y 20SEC y 30SEC y 40SEC y 50SEC y 1MIN y  
2MIN y .......38MN y 39MIN y 40MIN.  
where SEC means seconds (5SEC is 5 seconds) and MIN means  
minutes (1MIN is one minute).  
You cannot set a REC TIME that is less than one thirtieth as long as  
TAKE TOTAL TIME.  
For example: When TAKE TOTAL TIME is set to 1H, the smallest  
value of REC TIME is 2 MIN. (60 minutes divided by 30 gives 2  
minutes.)  
The time setting to be displayed when turning the MENU knob  
changes within the available setting times.  
Be sure to set REC TIME after setting TAKE TOTAL TIME.  
3-32 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
15 Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to PRE-LIGHTING  
3
16 Push the MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of PRE-LIGHTING changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the question  
mark.  
17 Push the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the  
desired time to turn on the light before starting recording appears.  
If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise, the  
PRE-LIGHTING time changes in order of OFF y 2SEC y  
5SEC y 10SEC.  
Note  
To turn on the light automatically before starting recording by  
setting the PRE-LIGHTING item to ON, be sure to set the LIGHT  
switch to AUTO. Also, set the switch of the light connected to the  
LIGHT connector to on.  
The light automatically turns on and off in auto interval rec mode.  
However, if the duration when the light should be off is less than 5  
seconds, the light is on continuously.  
When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the switch of the  
light is set to on, the light is always on.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-33  
18 To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen and the message  
AUTO INTERVAL **M**Sindicating auto Interval Rec mode  
appears along the bottom of the viewfinder.  
**M**S indicates the shooting interval. For example, when TAKE  
TOTAL TIME is set to 1H and REC TIME is set to 30 SEC, the  
message AUTO INTERVAL 00M04Sappears. The shooting  
interval is 4 seconds.  
3
The display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears  
along the top and bottom of the viewfinder.  
Note  
The settings for auto Interval Rec mode are maintained until changed.  
However, if you switch off the camcorder power, auto Interval Rec mode  
is cleared except for the TAKE TOTAL TIME and REC TIME settings.  
To use the auto Interval Rec function again after switching on the power,  
perform steps 1 to 6.  
Camcorder operation in auto Interval Rec mode  
Follow the procedure below to shoot and record the picture in auto  
Interval Rec mode after turning on auto Interval Rec mode and making  
the required settings.  
1
After performing the basic procedure for shooting and recording,  
following the instructions in 3-2-1 Basic Procedure(page 3-6),  
secure the camcorder so that it will not move.  
3-34 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
2
Push the VTR START button on the camcorder or the VTR button  
on the lens.  
The camcorder starts recording in auto Interval Rec mode. After the  
camcorder stores the 150 frames of picture data (for about five  
minutes) in memory, and actually records the stored picture data on  
the tape. Thus the tape runs intermittently. While recording in auto  
Interval Rec mode, the TALLY indicator (green tally) in the  
viewfinder flashes (4 flashes/second) and the message AUTO  
INTERVAL **M**Sflashes in the viewfinder screen. When the  
camcorder stores the picture data, the REC indicator in the  
viewfinder lights.  
3
After the time to be recorded on the tape (REC TIME) has elapsed,  
the camcorder automatically stops shooting and recording.  
To continue auto interval recording  
Press the VTR START button on the camcorder or the VTR button on  
the lens again.  
The camcorder starts auto interval recording again.  
To interrupt auto interval recording  
Press the VTR START button or VTR button on the lens. The  
camcorder stops recording.  
However, the tape may run to record picture data stored in memory until  
you interrupt auto interval recording.  
To end auto interval recording  
You can clear auto Interval Rec mode by the following two methods:  
Set the POWER switch to OFF.  
Set LOOP/INTVAL REC to OFF on the FUNCTION 1 page of the  
USER menu.  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-35  
Time required for shooting and time required for  
recording on the tape  
The auto Interval Rec mode is effective for shooting objects that moves  
very slowly. You do, however, need to set the total time for shooting  
(TAKE TOTAL TIME) and the time for recording on the tape (REC  
TIME).  
3
The time for shooting is the time required to shoot objects that moves  
very slowly. The camcorder stores the picture data a frame at a time as it  
is shot at the certain specified interval and records the picture data on  
tape when up to 150 frames are stored in memory.  
The time for recording on the tape is the length of recording the picture  
data shot during TAKE TOTAL TIME.  
The camcorder calculates the shooting interval based on two set values:  
TAKE TOTAL TIME and REC time.  
Total time for shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME)  
Shooting interval  
Time for recording on the tape (REC TIME)  
3-36 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
Notes on auto Interval Rec mode  
Take note of the following points.  
Time code  
In auto Interval Rec mode, the internal time code generator runs in R-  
RUN mode regardless of how the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set.  
The real time of the shooting is saved in the user bits.  
When you need to set the internal clock, use the TIME DATE page of  
the DIAGNOSIS menu.  
3
For details, see 4-8-6 Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clockon page 4-  
113.  
Audio  
The audio signal is not recorded in auto Interval Rec mode.  
Cassette control buttons  
While recording in auto Interval Rec mode (the green tally indicator in  
the viewfinder flashes (4 flashes/second)), you cannot use cassette  
control buttons (EJECT, REW, F FWD, PLAY and STOP). To use the  
cassette control buttons, stop auto interval recording by pressing the  
VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens.  
Menu operation  
While recording in auto Interval Rec mode (the green tally indicator in  
the viewfinder flashes (4 flashes/second)), you cannot change the  
settings of LOOP/INTVAL REC, TAKE TOTAL TIME and REC  
TIME. To change the settings, stop auto interval recording by pressing  
the VTR START button or VTR button on the lens.  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-37  
When the camcorder power is switched off during auto interval  
recording  
When you set the POWER switch to OFF, the camcorder will switch  
off by itself after the tape has run for a few seconds to record the  
picture data stored in the memory.  
If you remove the battery, unplug the DC cable, or cut power to the AC  
adaptor while auto interval recording, the picture data shot and stored  
before recording stops (maximum 5 seconds, 150 frames) will not be  
recorded. Do not change the battery during auto interval recording.  
3
When tape runs out during auto interval recording  
Note that the picture data (maximum 5 seconds, 150 frames) shot and  
stored before the tape stops is not recorded if the tape runs out and the  
camcorder stops.  
Setting the manual Interval Rec  
To record in manual Interval Rec mode, you need to turn on manual  
Interval Rec mode and set the number of frames to be recorded at  
shooting (NUMBER OF FRAME).  
1
Follow the procedure of steps 1 to 5 in Setting the auto Interval  
Recon page 3-27 to select LOOP/INTVAL REC on the  
FUNCTION 1 page.  
3-38 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
2
Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until M INT  
appears.  
02 FUNCTION1  
ASSIGN SW <1>  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
: EZ-FC  
: F.MIC  
3
FRONT MIC SELECT: MONO  
DF/NDF DF  
END SEARCH OFF  
:
:
LOOP/INTVAL REC :?M INT  
NUMBER OF FRAME :  
1
If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise, the  
setting changes in order of OFF y LOOP y A INT y M INT.  
When M INT appears, the camcorder is in manual Interval Rec  
mode. The TALLY indicator (green tally) flashes (2 flashes/second).  
Also, NUMBER OF FRAME appears.  
3
Push the MENU knob.  
The z mark at the left of LOOP/INTVAL REC changes to the t  
mark and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z mark.  
In this case, you can select another item.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-39  
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to NUMBER OF  
FRAME.  
02 FUNCTION1  
ASSIGN SW <1>  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
: EZ-FC  
: F.MIC  
3
FRONT MIC SELECT: MONO  
DF/NDF DF  
END SEARCH OFF  
:
:
LOOP/INTVAL REC : M INT  
,NUMBER OF FRAME :  
1
5
6
Push the MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of NUMBER OF FRAME changes to the z  
mark and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the  
desired number of frames to be recorded at shooting appears.  
If you turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise, the  
number changes in order of 1 y 2 y 4 y 8.  
7
Push the MENU knob.  
The ? mark at the left of setting changes to the z mark and the z  
mark at the left of NUMBER OF FRAME changes to the t mark.  
3-40 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
8
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen and the message  
“MANU INTERVAL *FRAME” indicating manual Interval Rec  
mode appears along the bottom of the viewfinder.  
*FRAME indicates the number of frames set in step 6.  
3
The display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears  
along the top and bottom of the viewfinder.  
Note  
The setting for manual Interval Rec mode are maintained until changed.  
However, if you switch off camcorder power, manual Interval Rec mode  
is cleared except for the NUMBER OF FRAME setting. To use manual  
Interval Rec function again after switching on the power, perform steps 1  
to 2.  
Camcorder operation in manual Interval Rec mode  
Follow the procedure below to shoot the picture in manual Interval Rec  
mode after turning on manual Interval Rec mode and making the  
required settings.  
1
After performing the basic procedure for shooting and recording,  
following the instructions in “3-2-1 Basic Procedure” (page 3-6) ,  
secure the camcorder so that it will not move.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-41  
2
Push the VTR START button on the camcorder or the VTR button  
on the lens.  
The camcorder starts recording in manual Interval Rec mode.  
Each time you press the VTR START button or VTR button, the  
camcorder stores the picture data of the set number of frames. The  
camcorder stores the 150 frames of picture data (for about 5  
seconds) in memory, and actually records the stored picture data on  
the tape. The tape runs intermittently. In manual Interval Rec mode,  
the TALLY indicator (green tally) in the viewfinder flashes (2  
flashes/second). While recording in manual Interval Rec mode, the  
message MANUAL INTERVAL *FRAMEflashes in the  
viewfinder screen and the REC indicator is on while storing the  
picture data in the memory.  
3
To end manual interval recording  
You can clear auto Interval Rec mode by the following two methods.  
However, the tape may run to record the picture data stored in the  
memory at the instant the tape stopped .  
Set the POWER switch to OFF.  
Press the EJECT button.  
Notes on manual Interval Rec mode  
Take note of the following points.  
Time code  
In manual Interval Rec mode, the internal time code generator runs in R-  
RUN mode regardless of how the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set.  
Audio  
The audio signal is not recorded in manual Interval Rec mode.  
3-42 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
Cassette control buttons  
While recording in manual Interval Rec mode (the green tally flashes (2  
flashes/second)), you cannot use cassette control buttons (REW, F  
FWD, PLAY and STOP). Note that the camcorder stops the manual  
interval recording if you press the EJECT button while manual interval  
recording. However, the tape may run to record the picture data stored  
in the memory before stopping the manual interval recording.  
3
Menu operation  
You cannot change the settings of LOOP/INTVAL REC and NUMBER  
OF FRAME on the FUNCTION 1 page after the camcorder starts  
manual interval recording. To change the settings, stops auto interval  
recording by setting the POWER switch to OFF or pressing the EJECT  
button.  
When the camcorder power is switched off during manual interval  
recording  
When the POWER switch switched OFF, the camcorder will switch  
off by itself after the tape has run for a few seconds to record the  
picture data stored in the memory.  
If you remove the battery, unplug the DC cable, or cut the power to the  
AC adaptor while manual interval recording, the image currently being  
shot on the camcorder (maximum 5 seconds, 150 frames) will not be  
recorded. Do not change the battery while manual interval recording.  
When tape runs out during manual interval recording  
Note that the picture data (maximum 5 seconds, 150 frames) at the  
instant the tape stopped is not recorded if the tape runs out and the  
camcorder stops.  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-43  
3-2-7 Continuous Recording on the Previous Cut  
By assigning the RE-TAKE function to the ASSIGN 1 switch, you can  
use the ASSIGN 1 switch to position the tape at the most recent cut,  
clear it and record the new cut.  
For detailed information, see 4-8-5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1/2  
Switcheson page 4-108.  
3
Tape running direction  
Cut 1  
Cut 3  
Cut 4  
Cut 2  
Example: After recording cut 3, clearing cut 3 and recording cut 4 after  
cut 2  
Continuous recording of a new cut after the cut before the  
most recent cut  
In the above example, with the camcorder in the recording pause mode  
after recording cut 3, press the RET switch on the lens while holding the  
ASSIGN 1 switch down.  
The camcorder automatically positions the tape at the end point of cut 2  
and changes to the recording pause mode.  
Record cut 4. Cut 4 is recorded after cut 2.  
Note  
When pictures consisting of cuts recorded using the RE-TAKE function  
are played back by the VTR for professional use, the CHANNEL  
CONDITION indicator, which indicates the condition of the played  
back signal of the VTR, may be lit in yellow or noise may be added to  
the cue audio for the first 2 or 3 seconds. To avoid this, it is  
recommended that you make the first part of the cut (in the above  
example, cut 4) about 3 seconds longer.  
3-44 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
3-2-8 Searching for the Last Recorded Portion  
and Turning in the Recording Pause Mode  
(End Search Function)  
The End Search Function allows the camcorder to search for the end of  
the recording on the tape after the recorded portion is rewound and  
played back.  
To use this function, set the END SEARCH function to ON on the  
FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu.  
3
For detailed information on menu operation, see 4-6-2 Basic Use of the Menuon  
page 4-49.  
Tape running direction  
Recorded portion  
Blank portion  
The current tape  
position  
Searching for the end of the  
recorded portion and turning  
in recording pause mode  
End Search function  
Searching for the end of the recording and turning in  
recording pause mode  
To start the recording again after rewinding the recorded tape, play it  
back and stop the camcorder, follow the procedure.  
Press the RET button on the Lens.  
The tape automatically runs and stops at the end of the recording. The  
camcorder is in recording pause mode.  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-45  
3-3 Checking the Recording  
Playback  
By pressing the PLAY button, you can review any length of recording in  
the viewfinder in black and white. There are two other ways to review  
the recording.  
Recording review: You can view the last 2 seconds of the recording in  
the viewfinder in black and white.  
Color playback: You can see the recording in color on a color video  
monitor without the need for any external adaptor.  
3
You may also view the picture during searching by rewinding or fast  
forwarding by pressing the PLAY + REW button or PLAY + F FWD  
button.  
See 2-3 Audio Functionson page 2-5 for information about the switches and  
controls used to select the audio output signal and to adjust the audio level.  
3-3-1 Checking the Last Two Seconds of the  
Recording Recording Review  
If you press the RET button on the lens while recording is paused, the  
last two seconds of the tape is automatically rewound, and that segment  
is played back on the viewfinder screen. Use this function to check  
whether recording went smoothly. If you hold the RET button down  
longer, at most 10 seconds of the tape is rewound and played back. After  
playback, the camcorder is ready to start recording again.  
By assigning the LENS RET function to the ASSIGN 1 switch, you can  
use the ASSIGN 1 switch in the same way as the RET button on the lens.  
For details, see 4-8-5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1/2 Switcheson page 4-  
108.  
Note  
The recording review functions only works if the recording you have  
made is at least 3 seconds long.  
3-46 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
3-3-2 Checking the Recording on the Color  
Video Monitor — Playback in Color  
Connect an HD color video monitor with the HD SDI input connector to  
the HD SDI OUT connector of the camcorder. By pressing the PLAY  
button, you can view the recorded picture.  
3
HDW-750/750CE  
HD monitor  
HD SDI input  
connector  
HD SDI OUT  
Color playback  
Note  
If HD SDI OUT is set to OFF on the OUTPUT SEL page of the USER  
menu, you cannot view the picture. Set HD SDI OUT to ON.  
For detailed information, see “4-8-2 Selecting the Output Signals” on page 4-100.  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-47  
When using the HKDW-702 extension board (not supplied)  
for down converting  
Connect the color video monitor to the TEST OUT connector or VBS/  
SDI OUT connector of the camcorder (when the HKDW-702 is  
installed). By pressing the PLAY button, you can view the recorded  
picture  
The signal output from each connector depends on the menu settings.  
For detailed information, see 4-8-2 Selecting the Output Signalson page 4-100.  
3
HDW-750/750CE  
NTSC/PAL monitor  
SDI input  
connector or  
video input  
connector a)  
Video input  
connector b)  
VBS/SDI OUT a)  
TEST OUT b)  
a) As the output signal from the VBS/SDI OUT connector, when  
SDI is selected on the OUTPUT SEL page of the USER  
menu, connect to the SDI input connector. When VBS is  
selected, connect to the video input connector.  
Note  
When REAR BNC OUT SEL is set to OFF on the OUTPUT  
SEL page of the USER menu, the signal is not output from  
the VBS/SDI OUT connector.  
b) When SD is selected as the output signal from the TEST  
OUT connector, connect to the video input connector.  
Color playback  
3-48 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
3-4 Recording the Recording  
Start Time Code onto the  
Memory Label - Tele-File  
The VTR section is compatible with the Tele-File memory label system.  
This system allows you to record the recording start time code, model  
name, serial No. and TAPE format onto the MLB-1M-100 memory label  
(not supplied). This is very helpful for management of the cassette tapes  
and to improve the efficiency of the tape editing.  
3
The memory label attached to the cassette is automatically detected.  
To record the recording start time code onto the memory  
label  
Follow the procedure below to record the recording start time code.  
1
Insert the cassette onto which the MLB-1M-100 memory label has  
been attached.  
1
Memory label  
Window  
outlet  
2
Cassette holder  
(Continued)  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-49  
2
Press the VTR START button or the VTR button on the lens.  
At the instant the recording starts, the time code of the recording  
start is recorded on the memory label.  
To confirm the remaining capacity on the memory label  
3
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while pushing the MENU  
knob .  
The TOP menu appears.  
<TOP MENU>  
,USER  
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
ALL  
OPERATION  
PAINT  
MANTENANCE  
FILE  
DIAGNOSIS  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to move t mark to FILE.  
Push the MENU knob.  
When the FILE menu is first used, the CONTENTS page appears.  
Or if you used the FILE menu already, the page that was on the  
screen when the last FILE menu operation ended appears on the  
viewfinder screen.  
4
When the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU knob to  
move t mark to TELE FILE, then push the MENU knob.  
When any page of the OPERATION menu is displayed, turn the  
MENU knob until the TELE FILE page appears, then push the  
MENU knob.  
3-50 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
The TELE FILE page appears.  
?10 TELE FILE  
TOP  
TELE FILE CLEAR : EXEC  
ID:  
SIZE  
REMAIN : 100%  
:
1KBYTE  
STATUS : STANDBY  
3
The remaining capacity of the memory label is displayed at the  
REMAIN column.  
You can record the recording start time code about 130 times on the  
memory label of 1 Kilobyte.  
Note  
When the remaining capacity of the memory label becomes 0 %,  
you can not record the recording start time code any more.  
0 %is displayed at the REMAIN column and the message  
MEMORY FULLis displayed at the STATUS column.  
Warnings on the viewfinder screen when the remaining  
capacity is 0 %  
In the following cases, the message TELE FILE MEMORY FULLis  
displayed at the setting change and adjustment progress message display  
area of the viewfinder.  
When loading the cassette onto which the memory label whose  
memory capacity is 0 % is attached.  
When loading the cassette onto which the memory label whose  
memory capacity is 0 % is attached and starting /stopping the  
recording  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-51  
To clear recorded data  
1
Follow steps 1 to 4 in “To confirm the remaining capacity on the  
memory label” until the TELE FILE page of the FILE menu is  
displayed on the viewfinder screen.  
The TELE FILE page appears.  
3
?10 TELE FILE  
TOP  
TELE FILE CLEAR : EXEC  
ID:  
SIZE  
REMAIN : 100%  
:
1KBYTE  
STATUS : STANDBY  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move t mark to TELE FILE CLEAR,  
then push the MENU knob.  
S10 TELE FILE  
CLEAR DATA OK? YES NO  
TOP  
,
,
TELE FILE CLEAR : EXEC  
ID:  
SIZE  
REMAIN : 100%  
:
1KBYTE  
STATUS : STANDBY  
The message “CLEAR DATA OK? YES NO” appears. In this case,  
the t mark is displayed on the front of “NO” and “NO” blinks.  
3-52 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move t mark to YES (YESblinks),  
then push the MENU knob.  
The data recorded on the memory label is cleared.  
100 % appears at the REMAIN column.  
Notes  
3
When the memory label is protected from accidental erasure, you  
cannot clear recorded data.  
The time code data is cleared. However, the memory label ID is not  
cleared.  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3-53  
4-1 Adjusting the Black  
Balance and the White  
Balance  
To always obtain excellent image quality when using this camcorder,  
conditions may require that both the black balance and the white balance  
be adjusted.  
The black balance will require adjustment in the following cases.  
When the camcorder is first used  
When the camcorder is used under conditions in which the surrounding  
temperature has changed greatly  
When the camcorder has not been used for a long time  
When the GAIN selector values have been changed by using the USER  
menu  
4
It is not usually necessary to adjust the black balance when using the  
camcorder after it has been off.  
White balance adjustment  
Always readjust the white balance when the lighting conditions change.  
Viewfinder screen displays  
If the black balance or white balance adjustment is started, messages that  
report on the progress and results are displayed on the viewfinder screen  
when VF DISP MODE is set to 2 or 3 on the VF DISP 1 page of the  
USER menu.  
Note  
Black balance and white balance adjustment values that are  
automatically set by the camcorder and the various settings are stored in  
the camcorder memory and retained even when the power is turned off.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-1  
4-1-1 Adjusting the Black Balance  
In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are performed in the  
following order: clamp level, black set, and black balance. Manual black  
balance adjustment can be selected from the setup menu.  
Follow the procedure below to adjust the black balance.  
1
2
Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM.  
4
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLK and release the switch.  
AUTO W/B BAL switch  
The switch returns to the center position, and the adjustment is executed.  
4-2  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
During adjustment, the following message is displayed on the viewfinder  
screen.  
The messages change in  
the following sequence : -  
BLACK SET- →  
-BLACK BAL- 1) -  
CHECK-  
BLACK:OP  
-BLACK SET-  
4
The black balance adjustment ends in a few seconds with the message  
BLACK:OKand the adjustment setting is automatically stored in  
memory.  
Notes  
During the black balance adjustment, the iris is automatically closed.  
During the black balance adjustment, the gain selection circuit is  
automatically activated so you may see flickering on the viewfinder  
screen, but this is not a fault.  
....................................................................................................................................  
1) If the existing black balance adjustment is satisfactory, the message BLACK  
BALmay not appear, that is, the automatic black balance adjustment may be  
omitted to save time.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-3  
If automatic black balance adjustment cannot be made  
If the black balance adjustment cannot be completed normally, an error  
message will appear for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen (in  
display mode 2 or 3).  
Possible messages are listed below.  
Black balance adjustment error messages  
Error message  
Meaning  
BLACK : NG  
IRIS NOT CLOSED  
The lens iris did not close; adjustment was  
impossible.  
4
BLACK : NG  
TIME LIMIT  
Adjustment could not be completed within  
the standard number of attempts.  
BLACK : NG  
R (or G or B) : OVERFLOW  
The difference between the reference  
value and the current value is so great that  
it exceeds the range. Adjustment was  
impossible.  
If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the black balance  
adjustment. Keep pushing the AUTO W/B BAL to BLK until BLACK  
SET- appears after the -CHECK- appears. If the error message occurs  
again, an internal check is necessary.  
For information about this internal check, refer to Maintenance Manual.  
Note  
If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the lens connector, it may not  
be possible to adjust the lens iris. If this happens, the black balance will  
be incorrect.  
4-4  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
Black balance memory  
Values stored in memory are held until the black balance is next  
adjusted.  
If a memory error occurs  
If the error message : STORED DATA : NGflashes on the viewfinder  
screen when the camcorder is turned on, the black balance memory  
content has been lost.  
Adjust the black balance again. Contact your Sony representative if this  
message continues to appear even after the black balance has been  
adjusted again.  
4
For more information, refer to Maintenance Manual.”  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-5  
4-1-2 Adjusting the White Balance  
Follow the procedure below to automatically adjust the white balance.  
1
Adjust the switches as shown in the figure below.  
FILTER selector  
4
GAIN switch:  
Set as low as  
possible.  
OUTPUT/DCC switch:  
CAM  
WHITE BAL switch:  
A or Ba)  
a) When WHITE SWITCH  
<B> is set to MEM on  
the FUNCTION 2 page  
of the OPERATION  
menu  
If the setting on the GAIN selector or WHITE BAL switch is changed, a  
message reporting the set position appears for about 3 seconds in the  
setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the  
viewfinder screen.  
4-6  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
2
Adjust the FILTER selector to suit the lighting conditions.  
ND filter  
Clear  
CC filter  
Cross filter  
3200K  
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
1/4 ND  
1/16 ND  
1/64 ND  
4300K  
6300K  
If the setting of the FILTER selector is changed, a message reporting  
the setting appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and  
adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen  
(in display mode 3).  
4
3
Place a white test card under the same lighting conditions as the  
subject to be shot and zoom up to it. Alternately, any white object  
such as a cloth or a wall could be used.  
The absolute minimum white area is as follows:  
Rectangle centered on the  
screen. The lengths of the  
sides are 70% of the length  
or the width of the screen.  
The white object must be  
within the rectangle and  
have an area of at least  
10% of the screen.  
Note  
Make sure there are not bright spots in the rectangle.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-7  
4
5
Adjust the lens iris.  
If the lens is manually adjusted, adjust it as appropriate.  
If the lens has an automatic iris, set the automatic/manual switch on  
the lens to automatic.  
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to WHT and release the switch.  
4
AUTO W/B BAL switch  
The switch returns to the center position, and the adjustment is executed.  
During adjustment, the message WHITE : OPis displayed on the  
viewfinder screen (in display mode 2 or 3).  
4-8  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
The white balance adjustment ends in a second with the message  
WHITE : OK, and the adjustment setting is automatically stored in the  
memory (A or B) that was selected in step 1.  
WHITE:OK  
. K  
4
Approximate color  
temperature of the object  
Note  
If the camera has a zoom lens with an automatic iris, the iris may hunt1)  
during the adjustment. To prevent this, adjust the iris gain knob (marked  
with IG, IS, or S) on the lens.  
For more information, refer to the lens operation manual.  
....................................................................................................................................  
1) Hunting  
Repeated brightening and darkening of an image, resulting from repeated  
response to automatic iris control.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-9  
If the automatic white balance adjustment cannot be  
made  
If the white balance adjustment cannot be completed normally, an error  
message will appear for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen (in  
display mode 2 or 3).  
Possible messages are listed below.  
White balance adjustment error messages  
Error message  
Meaning  
4
WHITE : NG  
LOW LEVEL  
The white video level is too low. Either make open  
the lens iris or increase the gain.  
WHITE : NG  
COLOR TEMP HIGH  
The color temperature is too high. Select a suitable  
filter setting.  
WHITE : NG  
COLOR TEMP LOW  
The color temperature is too low. Select a suitable  
filter setting.  
WHITE : NG  
TIME LIMIT  
Adjustment could not be completed within the  
standard number of attempts.  
WHITE : NG  
The white area could not be checked.  
POOR WHITE AREA  
WHITE : NG  
LEVEL TOO HIGH  
The white video level is too high. Either narrow the  
lens iris opening or change the ND filter.  
If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the white balance  
adjustment. If the error message occurs again, an internal check is  
necessary.  
For information about this internal check, refer to Maintenance Manual.  
4-10 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
If you have no time to adjust the white balance  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST. The white balance is  
automatically set to 3200 K when the FILTER selector is in position B,  
to C for 4300 K and to D for 6300 K.  
For details about setting the white balance manually, see “4-1-2 Adjusting the  
White Balance” on page 4-6.  
White balance memory  
Values stored in memory are held until the white balance is next  
adjusted.  
4
There are two sets of white balance memories, A and B, and adjustments  
for each of the filters can be automatically stored in the memory  
corresponding to the setting (A or B) of the WHITE BAL switch. The  
camcorder has four built-in filters, so a total of eight (4 × 2) adjustments  
can be stored. The number of memories allocated each A and B can be  
limited to one each by setting WHT FILTER INH. to ON on the  
FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu. In this case, the  
memory contents are not linked to the filters.  
When the WHITE BAL switch is set to B whereas, on the FUNCTION 2  
page of the OPERATION menu, “WHITE SWITCH <B>” is set to  
ATW, the ATW function is activated to automatically adjust the white  
balance of the picture being shot for varying lighting conditions.  
If a memory error occurs  
If the error message “: STORED DATA : NG” flashes on the viewfinder  
screen when the camcorder is turned on, the white balance memory  
content has been lost.  
Adjust the white balance again. Contact your Sony representative if this  
message continues to appear even after the white balance has been  
adjusted again.  
For more information, refer to “Maintenance Manual.”  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-11  
4-2 Setting the Electronic  
Shutter  
This section describes the shutter modes that can be used with the  
electronic shutter of the camcorder, and describes the procedure for  
selecting the shutter speed and mode.  
4-2-1 Shutter Modes  
The shutter modes that can be used with the electronic shutter and the  
shutter speeds that can be selected are listed below.  
4
Selectable shutter modes and speeds  
Shutter speed  
Application  
Mode  
59.94I format: 1/100, 1/125, For shooting fast-moving  
Standard  
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,  
12000 (sec.)  
subjects with little blurring.  
50I format: 1/60, 1/125, 1/  
250, 1/500, 1/1000,  
12000 (sec.)  
For obtaining images with no  
horizontal bands of noise  
when shooting subjects such  
as monitor screens.  
ECS (Extended  
Clear Scan)  
59.94I format: 30.0 to  
4300 Hz  
50I format: 25.0 to 4700 Hz  
Improved vertical resolution.  
However, the sensitivity and  
dynamic range are reduced.  
S-EVS  
(Enhanced  
Vertical  
1/60 sec. (fixed)  
definition System)  
Notes  
Whatever the operating mode of the electronic shutter, the sensitivity  
of the CCD decreases with increasing shutter speed.  
When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider and wider as the  
shutter speed increases, thus reducing the depth of field.  
4-12 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
Under artificial light, particularly fluorescent or mercury lamps, the  
light intensity may appear to be constant, but the strengths of each of  
the R, G and B colors are actually changing in synchronization with the  
frequency of the power supply (flicker). Using an electronic shutter  
under such lighting could make the flicker even worse. Color flicker is  
particularly likely to happen when the power supply frequency is 60 Hz  
(with the 59.94I format model) or 50 Hz (with the 50I format model).  
However, if the power frequency is 50 Hz (with the 59.94I format  
model) or 60Hz (50I format mode), setting the shutter speed to 1/100  
or 1/60 can reduce this flicker.  
When a bright object is shot in S-EVS mode or ECS mode in such a  
manner that it fills the screen, the upper edge of the picture may have  
poor quality because of an inherent characteristic of CCD. Before using  
S-EVS mode or ECS mode, check the shooting conditions.  
You can turn on or off the S-EVS mode on the SW STATUS page of  
the PAINT menu.  
4
4-2-2 Selecting the Shutter Mode and Speed  
Use the SHUTTER selector to select a shutter mode or a standard-mode  
shutter speed. To set the shutter speed in ECS mode, with the SHUTTER  
switch set to ON and the ECS mode selected, use the MENU knob for  
adjustment.  
You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu to  
narrow the range of choice in advance, or to select in advance whether or  
not you use ECS.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-13  
Setting the shutter mode and standard-mode shutter  
speed  
Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained even when the  
camcorder power is turned off.  
1
2
Follow the procedure described in 4-7-2 Selecting the Display  
Items(page 4-69) to set to VF DISPLAY MODE to 2 or 3 from the  
VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu.  
4
Push the SHUTTER selector from ON to SEL.  
SHUTTER selector  
4-14 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
The current shutter setting appears for about 3 seconds in the setting  
change and adjustment progress message display area of the  
viewfinder screen.  
E.g.: SS : 1/250 or : ECS : 60.00 Hz  
3
Before the message from step 2 disappears, push the SHUTTER  
selector to SEL again and repeat until the desired mode or speed  
appears.  
Pushing the SHUTTER selector to SEL repeatedly allows you to  
cycle through the settings of mode and speed preselected on the SHT  
ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu.  
4
Note that all modes and all standard-mode speeds listed in the table  
on page 4-12 are preselected using the SHT ENABLE page of the  
OPERATION menu.  
Standard mode  
(
)
1/100 or 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000  
ECS mode  
1/100 for the 59.94I format model  
1/60 for the 50I format model.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-15  
Setting the shutter speed in ECS mode  
Follow the procedure below.  
4
1
2
1
Set the shutter speed mode to ECS.  
ECS:60.00Hz  
ECS (Extended clear scan) page (factory settings)  
2
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the  
camera to increase the value, or clockwise to decrease the value,  
until the desired frequency appears.  
4-16 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
The frequency range can be changed between 30.0 and 4300 Hz (for  
the 59.94I format) or between 25.0 and 4700 Hz (for the 50I format).  
When the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit is connected  
You can set the shutter speed of ECS with the rotary encoder of the  
RM-B150.  
Changing the range of choice of shutter mode and speed  
settings  
4
You can reduce the time required to select the shutter mode and speed by  
narrowing the choice of settings in advance. This can be done by using  
the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu.  
Follow the procedure below.  
Note  
The settings selected on the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION  
menu become invalid when the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit is  
connected to the camcorder.  
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while pushing the MENU  
knob.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-17  
The TOP menu appears.  
<TOP MENU>  
,USER  
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
ALL  
OPERATION  
PAINT  
MANTENANCE  
FILE  
DIAGNOSIS  
4
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to OPERATION.  
Push the MENU knob.  
When the OPERATION menu is first used, the CONTENTS page  
appears.  
Or if you used the OPERATION menu already, the page that was on  
the screen when the last OPERATION menu operation ended  
appears on the viewfinder screen.  
4
When the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU knob to  
move t mark to SHT ENABLE, then push the MENU knob.  
When any page of the OPERATION menu is displayed, turn the  
MENU knob until the SHT ENABLE page appears, then push the  
MENU knob.  
4-18 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
The SHT ENABLE page appears, and the current settings are  
displayed on the page.  
17 SHT ENABLE  
The menu is for the  
,
SHUTTER ECS  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
59.94I format model.  
For the 50I format  
model, SHUTTER 1/60  
is displayed instead of  
SHUTTER 1/100.  
SHUTTER 1/100  
SHUTTER 1/125  
SHUTTER 1/250  
SHUTTER 1/500  
SHUTTER 1/1000  
SHUTTER 1/2000  
4
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the mode or shutter  
speed you want.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob until ON appears, then push the MENU knob.  
The z mark at the left of the selected item changes to the t mark  
and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z mark.  
To set another mode or speed continuously, return to step 5.  
For only the shutter speed set to ON, you can select the shutter speed  
using the SHUTTER switch.  
7
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
(When you close the cover, the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to  
OFF automatically.)  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen and the display  
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top  
and bottom of the viewfinder.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-19  
4-3 Changing the Reference  
Value for Automatic Iris  
Adjustment  
The reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be changed to  
enable the shooting of clear pictures of back-lit subjects, or to prevent  
white crush from the subject on which a spot light is turned. The  
reference value for the lens iris can be set within the following range  
with respect to the standard value.  
0.5: about 0.5 stop further open  
1: about 1 stop further open  
-0.5: about 0.5 stop further closed  
4
-1: about 1 stop further closed  
Also you can set the area where light detection occurs.  
Changing the reference value  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
When the USER menu is first used, the CONTENTS page appears.  
Or if you used the USER menu already, the page that was on the  
screen when the last USER menu operation ended appears on the  
viewfinder screen.  
2
When the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU knob to  
move t mark to AUTO IRS, then push the MENU knob.  
When any page of the USER menu is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob until the AUTO IRIS page appears, then push the MENU  
knob.  
4-20 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
The AUTO IRIS page appears.  
09 AUTO IRIS  
,
IRIS OVERRIDE  
IRIS SPEED  
:
ON  
ON  
OFF  
:
CLIP HIGH LIGHT :  
IRIS WINDOW  
IRIS WINDOW  
IRIS VAR WIDTH  
IRIS VAR HEIGHT :  
IRIS VAR H POS  
IRIS VAR V POS  
:
:
:
1
OFF  
240  
135  
0
:
:
4
0
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to IRIS OVERRIDE.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob until ON appears, then push the MENU knob.  
The z mark at the left of the selected item changes to the t mark  
and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z mark.  
The IRIS OVERRIDE is set to ON.  
5
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF. (When you close the cover,  
the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to OFF automatically.)  
The AUTO IRIS page disappears from the viewfinder.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-21  
6
Turn the MENU knob to change the reference value.  
Note  
Be sure to confirm that the shutter speed is set to any mode other  
than ECS.  
The changed reference value is retained until the power of the  
camcorder is turned off.  
Even if the reference value is changed, it reverts to the standard  
value every time the power is turned on. The reference value is  
normally set to the standard value.  
4
To open the iris by 0.5 stop:  
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the  
camera.  
One bar (s) appears in the upper part to the left of the F number in  
the iris indication.  
To open the iris by 1 stop:  
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the  
camera.  
Two bars (ss) appear in the upper part to the left of the F number  
in the iris indication.  
To close the iris by 0.5 stop:  
Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the  
camera.  
One bar (s) appears in the lower part to the left of the F number in  
the iris indication.  
To close the iris by 1 stop:  
Turn the MENU knob further clockwise as seen from the front of the  
camera.  
Two bars (ss) appear in the lower part to the left of the F number  
in the iris indication.  
4-22 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
F5 . 6  
4
Opening the lens iris  
Iris opened by 1 stop  
(two bars)  
F5 . 6  
Iris opened by 0.5 stop  
(one bar)  
Closing the lens iris  
Iris closed by 1 stop  
(two bars)  
F5 . 6  
Iris closed by 0.5stop  
(one bar)  
Opening or closing the lens iris  
When the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit is connected  
The IRIS control knob of the RM-B150 can be used for lens iris setting.  
The bar display (s) will not appear, however.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-23  
Selecting the automatic iris window  
1
2
Follow the procedure of steps 1 and 2 described in Changing the  
reference valueon page 4-20 to display the AUTO IRIS page.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to IRIS WINDOW  
IND.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
4
3
4
Turn the MENU knob until ON appears, then push the MENU knob.  
The z mark at the left of the selected item changes to the t mark  
and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z mark. The  
setting is executed.  
The currently selected auto iris window appears on the viewfinder  
screen.  
If it is not necessary to display the auto iris window on the  
viewfinder, set to OFF.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to IRIS WINDOW.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
4-24 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
5
Turn the MENU knob until the desired auto iris window appears,  
then push the MENU knob.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
The shaded parts in the illustrations indicate the area where  
light detection occurs.  
4
Auto iris window  
The z mark at the left of the selected item changes to the t mark  
and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z mark.  
If you select VARIABLE, the following items become effective and  
you can set the window of the desired size.  
Set each item to the desired size.  
Item  
Setting  
IRIS VAR WIDTH  
IRIS VAR HEIGHT  
IRIS VAR H POS  
The width of the window  
The height of the window  
The position of the window in the horizontal  
direction  
IRIS VAR V POS  
The position of the window in the vertical  
direction  
6
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF. (When you close the cover,  
the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to OFF automatically.)  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen and the display  
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top  
and bottom of the viewfinder.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-25  
To reduce the influence to the auto iris due to shooting a high  
luminance subject  
When shooting a high luminance subject, the auto iris closes too much  
and a white crush may occur on the image. In such a case, you can  
reduce the influence to the auto iris by setting CLIP HIGH LIGHT to  
ON on the AUTO IRIS page of the USER menu.  
Since the level exceeding a certain level is clipped, the influence to the  
auto iris is reduced.  
4
4-26 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-4 Adjusting the Audio Level  
Setting the AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches to AUTO  
automatically adjusts the input levels of the audio signal to be recorded  
in audio channel CH-1 or CH-2 . You can also adjust the audio level  
manually.  
For the audio level of the signal to be recorded in audio  
channel CH-3 or CH-4  
Only automatic adjustment of the audio level is available.  
When the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch is set to CH-3/4, the audio channel  
level meters display the level of the audio signals recorded in audio  
channels CH-3 and CH-4. You can select the audio input signals to be  
recorded for audio channel CH-3 and 4 by using the AUDIO IN CH-3/  
CH-4 switches.  
4
Manually adjusting the audio levels of the audio input  
from the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors  
Follow the procedure described below to adjust the audio levels of the  
audio input from the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors, which are to be  
recorded in audio channels CH-1 and CH-2.  
Note  
When 1 and 2 are not displayed under the audio channel level meters,  
the CH-1/2/ CH-3/4 switch is set to the CH-3/4 position. Set this switch  
to CH-1/2.  
At the factory setting, the XLR connection automatic detection mode of  
the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors is set to ON. In this case, start the  
operation from step 2.  
When the XLR connection automatic detection mode is set to OFF, start  
the operation from step 1.  
You can set the XLR connection automatic detection mode on the VTR  
MODE 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-27  
LEVEL  
4
CH-3  
CH-4  
0
10  
0
10  
F
R
W
3
2
AUTO  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-1  
CH-2  
N
AUDIO IN  
FRONT  
REAR  
F
R
WIRELESS  
W
1
MIC LEVEL control  
Manual adjustment of the audio levels of AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2  
1
2
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switch which corresponds to the  
channels to be adjusted among input signals connected to AUDIO  
IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors to REAR.  
To adjust and record both of channels 1 and 2, set the both AUDIO  
IN CH-1 and AUDIO IN CH-2 switches to REAR.  
Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) corresponding to the channel  
selected in step 1 to MANUAL.  
4-28 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
3
Adjust the LEVEL controls corresponding to the channel selected in  
step 1 so that at the maximum sound level, the level meter indicates  
-18 dB (segment above 20 segment). The second bar from the top  
may turn on occasionally, but do not allow the top bar to go on. If it  
goes on, the audio level is too high.  
Corresponding peak value  
0
Off  
10  
4
Those bars go on.  
20  
These bars go on.  
Normal input level  
30  
40  
1
2
Excessive input level  
Using the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls  
You can select the audio level controls to be used for adjusting the level  
of the audio signals input to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors on  
the VTR MODE-2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
At the factory  
setting  
Example 1  
Example 2  
Audio level  
to the CH-1  
LEVEL (CH-1)  
control  
The MIC LEVEL control is  
linked with LEVEL (CH-1)  
control  
MIC LEVEL  
control  
Audio level  
to the CH-2  
LEVEL (CH-2)  
control  
The MIC LEVEL control is  
linked with LEVEL (CH-2)  
control  
MIC LEVEL  
control  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-29  
Note  
When you select that the MIC LEVEL control is linked with the LEVEL  
(CH-1/CH-2) control(s), if the MIC LEVEL control is turned fully  
counterclockwise to 0, the audio signal input to AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2  
connectors cannot be recorded. Before adjusting the audio level using the  
LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls, confirm the setting of the MIC LEVEL  
control.  
Manually adjusting the audio level of the front  
microphone  
You can adjust the audio level input from the front microphone  
connected to the MIC IN connector, which is to be recorded in audio  
channels CH-1 and CH-2.  
4
Notes  
When 1 and 2 are not displayed under the audio channel level  
meters, the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch is set to the CH-3/4 position. Set  
this switch to CH-1/2.  
If the XLR connection automatic detection mode is set to ON, when  
the cables are connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors, the  
camcorder detects the connection to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2  
connectors. Thus, the AUDIO IN switch is internally reset to REAR  
and the audio signals input to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors  
are automatically selected.  
Before adjusting the audio level of the front microphone, confirm that  
no cables are connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors.  
Or set the REAR XLR AUTO to OFF on the VTR MODE 1 page of  
the MAINTENANCE menu.  
4-30 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4
LEVEL  
CH-3  
CH-4  
0
10  
0
10  
F
R
W
AUTO  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
2
1
CH-1  
CH-2  
N
AUDIO IN  
FRONT  
REAR  
WIRELESS  
F
R
W
3
Microphone audio level manual adjustment (1)  
1
2
To record the stereo sound, set both AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2  
switches to FRONT.  
To record the monaural sound, set the AUDIO IN CH-1 and/or CH-  
2 switch(es) corresponding to the channel to be adjusted and  
recorded to FRONT.  
For detailed information, see Recording the stereo soundon page 5-15.  
Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for the desired channel(s)  
selected in step 1 to MANUAL.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-31  
3
Rotate the MIC LEVEL knob to adjust the audio level so that at the  
maximum sound level, the level meter indicates -18 dB (segment  
above 20 segments).  
The 10 bars from the bottom among 17 bars go on with the normal  
input volume.  
The two bar from the top may turn on occasionally, but do not  
allow the top bar to go on. If it goes on, the audio level is too high.  
Note  
You cannot adjust the audio level of the L channel and R channel  
separately even if the stereo microphone is connected.  
4
Using the LEVEL controls  
You can select the audio level controls to be used to adjust the level of  
the audio signals input to the MIC IN connectors on the VTR MODE-2  
page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
At the factory  
setting  
Example 1  
Example 2  
The LEVEL (CH-1) control  
is linked with MIC LEVEL  
control  
Audio level  
to the CH-1  
MIC LEVEL  
control  
LEVEL (CH-1)  
control  
The LEVEL (CH-2) control  
is linked with MIC LEVEL  
control  
Audio level  
to the CH-2  
MIC LEVEL  
control  
LEVEL (CH-2)  
control  
Note  
When you select that LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) control(s) is linked with the  
MIC LEVEL control, if the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) control(s) is turned  
fully counterclockwise to 0, the audio signal input to AUDIO IN CH-1/  
CH-2 connectors cannot be recorded. Before adjusting the audio level  
using the MIC LEVEL control, confirm the setting of the LEVEL (CH-1/  
CH-2) controls.  
4-32 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
Input level of the audio channels CH-3 and CH-4  
The levels of the audio signals recorded in audio channels CH-3 and CH-  
4 are automatically adjusted. You cannot adjust them manually.  
You can select the audio signal to be recorded in audio channels CH-3  
and CH-4 using the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 switches.  
The XLR connector automatic detection function does not affect audio  
signals recorded in audio channels CH-3 and CH-4.  
The audio signal of the L channel is recorded in  
stereo recording, or the monaural sound is  
recorded in monaural recording.  
CH-3  
CH-4  
4
F
R
W
The audio signal input to AUDIO IN CH-1  
connector is recorded.  
The audio signal of the wireless microphone  
is recorded.  
The audio signal of the R channel is recorded in  
stereo recording, or the monaural sound is  
recorded in monaural recording.  
The audio signal input to AUDIO IN CH-2  
connector is recorded.  
F
R
W
The audio signal of the wireless microphone  
is recorded.  
Audio signals to be recorded in audio channels CH-3 and CH-4  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-33  
4-5 Setting the Time Data  
4-5-1 Setting the Time Code  
The time code setting range is from 00 : 00 : 00 : 00 to 23 : 59 : 59 : 29  
(hour : minute : second : frame).  
Follow the procedure below to set the time code.  
4
HOLD button  
CTL TC DATA  
DISPLAY  
OFF ON  
LIGHT  
HOLD  
RESET  
WARNING  
RESET button  
1
4
ADVANCE  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
LEVEL  
CH-3  
CH-4  
0
10  
0
10  
F
R
F-RUN  
REGEN  
CLOCK  
SET  
AUTO  
2
3
R-RUN  
W
MANUAL  
MEMORY STICK  
OPEN  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CUE IN  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
AUDIO IN  
DATA DISPLAY  
FRONT  
REAR  
WIRELESS  
F
R
W
U-BIT  
TIME  
SHOT  
NO  
Setting the time code  
1
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.  
4-34 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
2
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET.  
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.  
3
4
Using the SHIFT and ADVANCE buttons, set the time code.  
SHIFT: Selects a digit to set. Each time you press the button, the  
flashing digit moves one column to the right.  
Pressing this button while holding down the HOLD button  
moves the flashing digit one to the left.  
ADVANCE: Increments the value of the flashing digit.  
Pressing this button while holding down the HOLD button  
decrements the flashing digit.  
4
Resetting a modified numeric value to 00:00:00:00  
To reset a numeric value that was modified, press the RESET  
button.  
5
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or R-RUN.  
F-RUN: Free run. The time code generator keeps running,  
regardless of the operating state of the VTR.  
R-RUN: Recording run. The time code generator runs only while  
recording.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-35  
To set the drop frame mode/non-drop frame mode  
You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or non-drop frame (NDF)  
mode on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu or OPERATION  
menu or on the VTR MODE 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu  
To make the time code continuous  
When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to R-RUN, recording a  
number of scenes on the tape normally produces continuous time codes.  
If, however, you take the cassette out at some point, the time code will  
no longer be continuous.  
4
To make the time code continuous, follow the procedure below.  
1
2
3
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to REGEN.  
Use the PLAY buttons to play back.  
Watching the playback, find the point of the previous recording on  
the tape from which you wish to continue recording, and press the  
STOP button.  
4
Press the RET button on the lens.  
This reads the previous recording and synchronizes the internal time  
code generator, thus allowing the new time code recorded to follow  
on consecutively.  
4-5-2 Saving the Real Time in the Time Code  
Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to CLOCK saves the real  
time in the time code.  
When it is necessary to set the real time, use the TIME DATE page of  
the DIAGNOSIS menu.  
For details, see 4-8-6 Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clockon page 4-113.  
4-36 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-5-3 Setting the User Bits  
By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal digits), you can record user  
information such as the date, time, or scene number on the time code  
track.  
Follow the procedure below to set the user bits.  
4
HOLD button  
CTL TC DATA  
DISPLAY  
OFF ON  
LIGHT  
HOLD  
RESET  
WARNING  
RESET button  
1
4
ADVANCE  
PRESET  
SHIFT  
LEVEL  
CH-3  
CH-4  
2,5  
0
10  
0
10  
F
R
F-RUN  
REGEN  
CLOCK  
SET  
AUTO  
R-RUN  
W
MANUAL  
MEMORY STICK  
OPEN  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CUE IN  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
AUDIO IN  
DATA DISPLAY  
FRONT  
REAR  
WIRELESS  
F
R
W
U-BIT  
TIME  
SHOT  
NO  
3
Setting the user bits  
1
Set the DISPLAY switch to DATA.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-37  
2
3
4
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.  
Set the DATA DISPLAY switch to U-BIT.  
Set the user bits by using the SHIFT and ADVANCE buttons.  
SHIFT: Selects a digit to set. Each time you press the button, the  
flashing digit moves one column to the right.  
Pressing this button while holding down the HOLD button  
moves the flashing digit one to the left.  
4
ADVANCE: Increments the value of the flashing digit.  
Pressing this button while holding down the HOLD button  
decrements the flashing digit.  
Hexadecimal digits A to F are displayed as follows:  
Hexadecimal  
Display  
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
b
C
d
E
F
Resetting a modified numeric value to 00:00:00:00  
To reset a numeric value that was modified, press the RESET  
button.  
5
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or R-RUN,  
corresponding to the desired time code run mode.  
The specified user bits will be recorded for both LTC and VITC.  
To store the user bits in memory  
The user bits setting (apart from the real time) is automatically retained  
in memory even when the power is turned off.  
4-38 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-5-4 Synchronizing the Time Code  
You can synchronize the internal time code generator of this camcorder  
with an external generator for the regeneration of an external time code.  
You can also synchronize the time code generators of external VTRs  
with the internal generator of this camcorder.  
Connections for time code synchronization  
Connect both the reference video signal and the external time code as  
illustrated below.  
4
Example 1: Synchronizing with an external time code  
Reference video signal a)  
GENLOCK IN  
External time code  
a) In addition to the HD-Y signal, the NTSC  
TC IN  
composite video signal can be input as the  
reference video signal.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-39  
Example 2: Interconnecting a number of camcorders for time code  
synchronization  
TEST OUTa)  
TC OUT  
Reference camcorder  
TC IN  
4
GENLOCK IN b)  
TC OUT  
TEST OUTa)  
GENLOCK IN b)  
TC IN  
TC OUT  
TEST OUT a)  
To another camcorder to be  
synchronized  
a) When the HKDW-702 (not supplied) is installed, the down-converted  
video signal of the camcorder cannot be used as the reference signal.  
When interconnecting a number of camcorders, output the HD analog  
component signal (HD-Y signal) from the TEST OUT connector.  
For details, see 4-8-2 Selecting the Output Signalson page 4-100.  
b) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE  
menu.  
4-40 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
Procedure for time code synchronization  
Follow the procedure below to synchronize the time code.  
4
3
4
1
2
5
Synchronizing the time code  
1
2
3
4
Turn the POWER switch to ON.  
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET.  
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN.  
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-41  
5
Supply the time code and reference video signals that comply with  
the SMPTE time code standard and are in the proper phase  
relationship to the TC IN connector and to the GENLOCK IN  
connector respectively.  
This operation synchronizes the internal time code generator with  
the external time code. After about 10 seconds, you can disconnect  
the external time code without losing the synchronization. However,  
the synchronization will be disrupted if you connect or disconnect  
the time code during recording.  
4
Note  
When you finish the above procedure, the time code is immediately  
synchronized with the external time code and the counter display will  
show the value of the external time code. However, wait for a few  
seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before recording.  
If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the same as the  
frame frequency of the camcorder, the camera cannot be correctly  
genlocked. In such a case, the time code is not correctly synchronized  
with the external time code.  
When GENLOCK ON/OFF is set to OFF on the GENLOCK page of  
the MAINTENANCE menu, the time code cannot be synchronized  
with the reference video signal. In this case, set GENLOCK ON/OFF  
to ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
User bit settings during time code synchronization  
When the time code is synchronized, only the time data is synchronized  
with the external time code value. Therefore, the user bits can have their  
own settings for each camcorder. You can also synchronize the user bits  
with external user bit data.  
For more information, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
4-42 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
To release the time code synchronization  
First disconnect the external time code, then set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN  
switch to R-RUN.  
To change the power supply from the battery pack to an  
external power supply during time code synchronization  
To maintain a continuous power supply, connect the external power  
supply to the DC IN connector before removing the battery pack. You  
may lose time code synchronization if you remove the battery pack first.  
4
Camera synchronization during time code synchronization  
During time code synchronization, the camera is genlocked to the  
reference video signal input from the GENLOCK IN connector.  
When the NTSC/PAL composite video signal is input as the reference  
video signal, the genlock H-phase cannot be adjusted. Also, subcarrier of  
the down-converted signal (composite video signal) of the camcorder  
cannot be synchronized with external equipment when the HKDW-702  
(not supplied) is installed.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-43  
4-5-5 Setting the Cassette Numbers and Shot  
Numbers  
Follow the procedure below to set a cassette number or shot number.  
4
HOLD button  
RESET button  
Setting a cassette number or shot number  
1
Set the DISPLAY switch to DATA.  
4-44 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
2
Set the DATA DISPLAY switch to SHOT-NO.  
A cassette number (left-hand 3 digits) and a shot number (right-hand  
3 digits) appear in the display panel.  
3
4
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.  
The rightmost digit of the shot number starts flashing.  
Set the cassette number or shot number (up to 999) by using the  
SHIFT and ADVANCE buttons.  
4
SHIFT: Selects a digit to set. Each time you press the button, the  
flashing digit moves one column to the right.  
Pressing this button while holding down the HOLD button  
moves the flashing digit one to the left.  
ADVANCE: Increments the value of the flashing digit.  
Pressing this button while holding down the HOLD button  
decrements the flashing digit.  
To reset the cassette number or shot number to 001  
Select any digit of the cassette number or shot number, making it  
flash, then press the RESET button.  
5
Return the DISPLAY switch, DATA DISPLAY switch and F-RUN/  
SET/R-RUN switches to the original positions.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-45  
4-6 Menu Display on the  
Viewfinder Screen  
4-6-1 Menu Configuration  
The following shows the configuration of menus that you can use to  
make various settings and adjustments.  
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE sub menu Just as with the  
ALL sub menu  
OPERATION sub menu  
PAINT sub menu  
MAINTENANCE sub menu  
FILE sub menu  
DIAGNOSIS sub menu  
USER sub menu,  
each sub menu is  
composed of pages.  
On these pages you  
can make various  
settings and  
TOP menu  
4
adjustments. Some  
pages have a window  
for more settings.  
This manual refers to  
these sub menus as  
the menu.  
OUTPUT SEL page  
FUNCTION 1 page  
VF DISP 1 page  
VF DISP 2 page  
!LED page  
MARKER page  
GAIN SW page  
VF SETTING page  
AUTO IRIS Page  
SHOT ID page  
USER sub menu a)  
SHOT DISP page  
SET STATUS page  
USER FILE page  
LENS FILE page  
a) In this manual, the USER menu consisting of items and pages registered at the  
factory is used.  
You use the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu to add or delete pages according  
to how the camcorder is being used.  
For details, see 4-6-3 Editing the USER Menuon page 4-55.  
4-46 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
TOP menu  
The menus of the camcorder are composed of submenus classified into  
categories according to the frequency of use, purpose of use and so on.  
The TOP menu allows you to select the desired submenus.  
To display the TOP menu screen:  
While holding down the MENU knob, set the MENU ON/OFF switch  
from the OFF position to the ON position.  
<TOP MENU>  
4
,USER  
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
ALL  
OPERATION  
PAINT  
MANTENANCE  
FILE  
DIAGNOSIS  
Note  
The display of the TOP menu is inhibited according to AT circuit board  
switch settings inside the HDW-750/750CE camcorder.  
Refer to the Maintenance Manual for more information.  
The TOP menu has the following submenus.  
USER menu:  
This menu contains items for making settings or changing the settings  
needed to operate the camcorder. This menu is normally displayed when  
the MENU ON/OFF switch is changed to ON.  
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu:  
This menu allows you to add the desired pages or delete them to suit  
your needs.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-47  
ALL menu:  
This menu contains all items of the OPERATION menu, PAINT menu,  
MAINTENANCE menu, FILE menu and DIAGNOSIS menu.  
OPERATION menu:  
This menu contains items for changing settings according to conditions  
related to the subject when the camcorder is being operated.  
PAINT menu  
This menu contains items for making detailed image adjustments while  
using a waveform monitor to monitor the waveforms output by the  
camera. Support of a video engineer is usually required to use this menu.  
Although you can also use an external remote control panel or master  
setup unit to set the items on this menu, this menu is effective when  
using the camcorder by itself outdoors.  
4
MAINTENANCE menu  
This menu contains items for performing camera maintenance  
operations, such as changing the system or using infrequently used paint  
items.  
FILE menu  
This menu is for performing file operations, such as writing the reference  
file.  
DIAGNOSIS menu  
This menu enables you to confirm the VTR status or identify a failed  
circuit board.  
To return to the TOP menu  
The following two methods are available:  
Point the arrow (t) to TOP on the right top on each page, then press  
the MENU knob.  
Keep pushing the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to the ESCAPE  
side until the TOP menu appears.  
4-48 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-6-2 Basic Use of the Menu  
If the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to ON, the USER menu is displayed  
on the viewfinder screen.  
This section explains operations on the USER menu. If the HKDW-702  
(not supplied) and/or HKDW-703 (not supplied) are not equipped with  
your camcorder, some of items on the USER menu pages are not  
displayed. But the operations are the same as those on menus other than  
the USER menu.  
4
CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE switch  
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
Controls for use of the basic use of the menu  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-49  
1
Switch the MENU ON/OFF switch from OFF to ON.  
The USER menu will be displayed.  
4
When the USER menu is first used, the CONTENTS page appears.  
Follow the procedure below.  
Or if you used the USER menu already, the page that was on the  
screen when the last USER menu operation ended appears on the  
viewfinder screen. In this case, go to step 2.  
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to desired page.  
Scrolls downward.  
00 CONTENTS  
m
TOP  
M
M
m
01.OUTPUT SEL  
02.VF DISP 1  
03.VF DISP 2  
04.GAIN SW  
Scrolls upward.  
05.FUNCTION1  
06.SHOT ID  
07.SHOT DISP  
08.MARKER1  
09.AUTO IRIS  
tmark  
,10.SET STATUS  
4-50 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
2
Push the MENU knob.  
The desired page is displayed. Start step 4.  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears.  
Push the MENU knob.  
The t mark appears at the left of the item currently selected on the  
page.  
4
01 OUTPUT SEL  
,HD SDI OUT  
:
OFF  
REAR BNC OUT SEL:  
TEST OUT SELECT :  
DOWN CON MODE  
OFF  
HD  
: LETTR  
4
Turn the move MENU knob to move the t mark to the desired  
item.  
Turning the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the  
front of the camera: Moves the t mark up continuously.  
Turning the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the  
camera: Moves the t mark down continuously.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-51  
5
Push the MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
01 OUTPUT SEL  
HD SDI OUT  
:
OFF  
REAR BNC OUT SEL:  
TEST OUT SELECT :  
DOWN CON MODE  
OFF  
HD  
:?LETTR  
4
6
Turn the MENU knob to change the settings.  
To increase a setting value  
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the  
camera.  
To decrease a setting value  
Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the  
camera.  
As turning the MENU knob, the setting increases or decreases one  
step by on step.  
If you turn the knob quickly, the numeric value changes rapidly. If  
you turn it slowly, you can make minute adjustments.  
To toggle a setting on or off  
To select the ON setting, turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as  
seen from the front of the camera.  
To select the OFF setting, turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen  
from the front of the camera.  
4-52 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
To cancel the setting/to reset the setting to the initial setting  
You can cancel the setting and reset it to its initial value (one set at  
the factory, or preset value) by pushing the CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE switch to CANCEL/PRST before pushing the MENU  
knob in step 7.  
When the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch is set to CANCEL/  
PRST, the message CANCEL?appears. To cancel the previous  
setting, push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to CANCEL/  
PRST again.  
To reset the setting to the initial value, push the CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE switch to CANCEL/PRST a third time. The message  
PRESET?appears. To reset to the initial setting, push the  
CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to CANCEL/PRST once more.  
4
The action of the CANCEL/PRST function differs for some setting  
items. Some items are only affected by PRST. Check the setting  
procedure for each item for more information.  
To interrupt changing the settings  
By setting the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF, the menu disappears  
from the viewfinder screen. By setting the MENU ON/OFF switch  
to ON again, the values that were displayed when you interrupted  
the setting operations will reappear so you can continue making  
settings.  
7
8
Push the MENU knob.  
The z mark at the left of the selected item changes to the t mark  
and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z mark. The  
setting is executed.  
To continue setting other items in the same page, repeat steps from 4  
to 7.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-53  
To move to another page  
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the t arrow to the page number,  
then push the MENU knob.  
Or, when the t mark is placed at a position other than the page  
number, push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to ESCAPE.  
The question mark appears in front of the page number. The  
camcorder is in page selecting mode.  
4
2
3
Turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears.  
Push the MENU knob when the desired page appears.  
To end menu operations  
Turn the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF. Or close the cover. This results  
in automatically setting the switch to OFF.  
4-54 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-6-3 Editing the USER Menu  
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to configure a USER  
menu that consists only of pages and items that you need by adding,  
deleting or replacing the pages. The USER 1 to USER 5 pages allow you  
to add, delete or replace the items.  
Adding a new page  
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add the new page  
to the USER menu.  
On the USER 1 page, the items are already set at the factory. USER 2 to  
USER 5 pages are blank. You can register up to 10 items on each page.  
4
1
While holding down the MENU knob, change the MENU ON/OFF  
switch from the OFF position to the ON position.  
The TOP menu appears.  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to USER MENU  
CUSTOMIZE, then push the MENU knob.  
When the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu is first used, the  
CONTENTS page appears. Follow the procedure below.  
Or if you have already used the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu,  
the page that was on the screen when the last USER MENU  
CUSTOMIZE menu operation ended appears on the viewfinder  
screen.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-55  
3
When the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU knob to  
move the t mark to one of USER 2 to USER 5, then push the  
MENU knob.  
When another page is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the  
desired page of USER 2 to USER 5 appears, then push the MENU  
knob.  
Example: When you select the USER 2 page  
4
? 03 USER2 EDIT  
,Add New Item  
4
After confirming the t mark at the left of Add NEW Item, push the  
MENU knob.  
The page on which you can add items appears.  
27 BLACK  
ESC  
SELECT ITEM  
,MASTER BLACK  
R BLACK  
B BLACK  
MASTER FLARE  
R FLARE  
G FLARE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ON  
B FLARE  
FLARE  
HD TESTOUT SEL  
:
Y
4-56 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
5
Add the items.  
1
2
Turn the MENU knob until the page that has the desired items  
appears, then push the MENU knob.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the desired item,  
then push the MENU knob.  
The USER 2 page appears again. The newly added item is  
displayed and Add NEW Item is displayed under the new item.  
4
3
Add the remaining items by repeating steps 1 and 2.  
You can add up to 10 items on one page. When the 10th item is  
registered, Add New Item disappears.  
Deleting items from a page  
1
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the item that you  
want to delete, then push the MENU knob.  
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to CANCEL/PRST.  
The message DELETE ITEM OK?appears.  
3
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to CANCEL/PRST  
again.  
The item is deleted.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-57  
Replacing items on the page  
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the item that you  
want to replace, then push the MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z mark.  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the position where  
you want to move the item, then push the MENU knob.  
4
? 02 USER1 EDIT  
PUSH TO ITEM INSERT  
,WHITE <B> CH  
TEST OUT MENU  
:
AWB  
OFF  
OFF  
:
OFFSET WHITE <A>:  
WARM COOL  
COLOR FINE  
MASTER BLACK  
Add New Item  
<A>: 3200  
<A>:  
0
0
:
The item selected in step 1 move to the position that you selected in  
step 2.  
In the above example, MASTER BLACK is moved to the top and  
other items are moved down one at a time.  
4-58 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
Inserting a blank row  
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the position where you  
want to insert a blank row, and keep pushing the MENU knob for about  
1.5 seconds.  
A blank row is inserted.  
? 02 USER1 EDIT  
PUSH TO ITEM INSERT  
MASTER BLACK  
WHITE <B> CH  
:
:
0
AWB  
4
TEST OUT MENU  
:
OFF  
OFF  
OFFSET WHITE <A>:  
WARM COOL  
COLOR FINE  
Add New Item  
<A>: 3200  
0
<A>:  
Keep pushing  
the MENU knob  
for about 1.5  
seconds.  
? 02 USER1 EDIT  
MASTER BLACK  
:
:
:
0
AWB  
OFF  
OFF  
,
WHITE <B> CH  
TEST OUT MENU  
OFFSET WHITE <A>:  
WARM COOL  
COLOR FINE  
Add New Item  
<A>: 3200  
<A>:  
0
In the above example, a blank row is inserted between MASTER  
BLACK and WHITE <B> CH.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-59  
Adding/deleting/replacing pages  
You can add a new page to the USER menu, delete a page from the  
USER menu or replace pages.  
To add a page  
1
While holding down the MENU knob, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch from the OFF position to the ON position.  
The TOP menu appears.  
4
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to USER MENU  
CUSTOMIZE, then push the MENU knob.  
When the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu is first used, the  
CONTENTS page appears. Follow the procedure below.  
Or if you have already used the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu,  
the page that was on the screen when the last USER MENU  
CUSTOMIZE menu operation ended appears on the viewfinder  
screen.  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to EDIT PAGE, then  
push the MENU knob, when the CONTENTS page is displayed.  
When another page is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the  
EDIT PAGE appears, then push the MENU knob.  
The EDIT PAGE appears.  
01 EDIT PAGE  
,Add New Page  
01.OUTPUT SEL  
02.FUNCTION 1  
03.VF DISP 1  
04.VF DISP 2  
05.'!'LED  
06.MARKER 1  
07.GAIN SW  
08.VF SETTING  
4-60 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to Add New Page, then  
push the MENU knob.  
The REMAIN PAGE where you can select the page to be added  
appears.  
REMAIN PAGE  
SELECT PAGE  
,00.USER 1  
ESC  
01.USER 2  
02.USER 3  
03.USER 4  
04.USER 5  
05.FUNCTION 2  
06.VF DISP 1  
07.MARKER 2  
08.TEST & RET  
09.OFFSET WHT  
4
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the desired page, then  
push the MENU knob.  
The selected page is added to the last page of the USER menu.  
To cancel adding a page  
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to ESC at the right top of the  
screen, then push the MENU knob.  
The EDIT PAGE appears again.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-61  
To delete a page  
1
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the page to be  
deleted.  
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to CANCEL/PRST.  
The message DELETE PAGE OK?appears.  
4
01 EDIT PAGE  
DELETE PAGE OK ?  
Add New Page  
01.OUTPUT SEL  
02.FUNCTION 1  
03.VF DISP 1  
,04.VF DISP 2  
05.'!'LED  
06.MARKER 1  
07.GAIN SW  
08.VF SETTING  
09.USER 1  
3
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to CANCEL/PRST  
again.  
In the above example, the VF DISP 2 page is deleted.  
4-62 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
To move a page  
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the page that you  
want to move.  
The t mark at the left of the selected page changes to the z mark.  
The message PUSH TO PAGE INSERTappears at the right top of  
the screen.  
2
Turn MENU knob to move the t mark to the position where you  
want to move the page selected in step 1.  
4
01 EDIT PAGE  
PUSH TO PAGE INSERT  
Add New Page  
01.OUTPUT SEL  
02.FUNCTION 1  
03.VF DISP 1  
,04.'!'LED  
05.MARKER 1  
06.GAIN SW  
07.VF SETTING  
08.USER 1  
In the above example, USER 1 is inserted in the 04 position, and the  
!LED page and pages after that move down one at a time after the  
operation in the following step 3 is completed.  
3
Push the MENU knob.  
The page selected in step 1 is moved to the position selected in step  
2.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-63  
4-7 Status Display on the  
Viewfinder Screen  
The viewfinder screen displays not only the video picture but also  
characters and messages indicating the camcorder settings and operating  
status, a center marker, a safety zone marker, etc.  
When the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to OFF and the DISPLAY  
switch is set to ON, the items for which an ONsetting was made in the  
VF DISP1 page of the USER menu or with related switches are  
displayed at the top and bottom of the screen. The messages that give  
details of the settings and adjustment progress and results can also be  
made to appear for about 3 seconds while settings are being changed,  
during adjustment, and after adjustment.  
4
For information about the display item selection, see 4-7-2 Selecting the Display  
Itemson page 4-69. For information about setting change and adjustment  
progress messages, see 4-7-3 Display Mode and Setting Change and Adjustment  
Progress Messageson page 4-72.  
For information about marker display, see 4-7-4 Setting the Marker Displayon  
page 4-74.  
4-64 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-7-1 Layout of the Status Display on the  
Viewfinder Screen  
All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder screen are shown  
below.  
1
2
3
4
5
EX  
Z 9 9  
3 . 2 K  
+
W #  
2 0 %  
HDW750  
qj  
qh  
qg  
qf  
01/ 0/30 12 : 10  
SHOT ID (14)  
4
Setting change and  
adjustment progress  
message display area  
WHITE : NG  
LEVEL TOO HIGH  
TCG 0 : 00 : 11 : 03  
LOW LIGHT  
6
1A W:A  
0
dB 1/1000  
15-10  
F5.6  
qd qs qaq;  
9
8 7  
1 Extender  
EX is displayed when a lens extender is used.  
2 Zoom position indicator 1)  
This indicator indicates the approximate position of the variator 2) of the  
zoom lens, between wide angle and telephoto.  
3 Color temperature  
This shows the currently selected color temperature.  
4 UHF wireless microphone reception level  
This shows reception level of the wireless microphone when the UHF  
wireless microphone is attached, using four x which appear at the right  
of W. When four x are lit, the receiving condition is good.  
....................................................................................................................................  
1) Zoom position indicator  
This indicator appears only when you use a lens that has a zoom position display  
function.  
2) Variator  
A group of lenses that are moved to adjust the focal length.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-65  
5 Remaining battery/battery voltage indicator  
This shows the battery voltage of the DC IN connector.  
When an Anton Bauer Intelligent Battery System is used, the indication  
is automatically switched and shows the remaining battery capacity of  
the Anton Bauer battery numerically.  
6 Subject illumination indicator  
This appears, depending on the setting, to indicate the subject  
illumination is inadequate.  
4
7 Iris setting/auto iris override  
This indicator indicates the f-stop (iris setting) of the lens.  
Also, the auto iris override is displayed using two x which appear in the  
upper and lower parts to the left of the F number respectively.  
8 Remaining tape  
This indicator indicates the remaining tape recording time (in minutes) of  
the VTR.  
Example of remaining tape indicator  
Display  
F - 30  
Tape time remaining  
Full to 30 minutes  
30 to 25 minutes  
25 to 20 minutes  
20 to 15 minutes  
15 to 10 minutes  
10 to 5 minutes  
30 - 25  
25 - 20  
20 - 15  
15 - 10  
10 - 5  
5 - 0  
5 to 2 minutes  
5 - 0 (flashing)  
Less than 2 minutes  
4-66 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
9 Audio level  
These indicators indicate the level of audio channel 1 and channel 2. The  
peak indication of the VTR level meter is related as follows to the audio  
level when an 1-kHz sine wave is input.  
Audio channel 1 level  
indicator  
Audio channel 2 level  
indicator  
VTR level meter  
indicator  
-40  
-30  
-20 -17 -14(dB)  
4
0 Shutter speed  
This indicator indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode. However,  
if the SHUTTER switch is set to OFF, nothing is displayed.  
1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000: Shutter speed (in seconds) in  
standard mode.  
ECS: ECS mode  
EVS: S-EVS mode  
qa Gain  
This indicator indicates the gain (in dB) of the video amplifier, as set by  
the GAIN selector.  
qs White balance memory  
This indicator indicates the currently selected white balance automatic  
adjustment memory.  
A: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to A.  
B: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to B.  
P: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST or when the  
preset button on the RM-B150 has been pushed.  
T: ATW is being used.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-67  
qd Filter  
This indicator indicates the currently selected filter types.  
qf Time code indicator  
This indicates the time code, user bits or other information selected by  
the DISPLAY switch and DATA DISPLAY switch settings.  
For more information, see Relationships between the DISPLAY switch and DATA  
DISPLAY switch settings and the time counter displayson page 2-44.  
qg ID number indicator  
This indicates the ID number selected from ID 1 to ID 4. This indicator  
is recorded together with the color bars.  
4
qh Date and time indicator  
This shows the date and time of recording. This indicator is recorded  
together with the color bars.  
qj Model name and serial number indicator  
This displays the model name and serial number of the camcorder. This  
indicator is recorded together with the color bars.  
4-68 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-7-2 Selecting the Display Items  
To select the items to be displayed on the viewfinder screen from the VF  
DISP and VF DISP 2 pages of the USER menu, turn on or off the  
indication next to each item.  
Follow the procedure below to select the items to be displayed on the  
viewfinder screen.  
4
CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE switch  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
MENU knob  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended  
appears on the viewfinder screen.  
Turn the MENU knob until the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP 2 page  
appears, and push the MENU knob.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-69  
The VF DISPLAY page appears.  
The current settings of items appear to the right of each item.  
03 VF DISP 1  
,VF DISP  
VF DISPLAY MODE :  
:
ON  
3
DISP EXTENDER  
DISP FILTER  
DISP WHITE  
DISP GAIN  
DISP SHUTTER  
DISP AUDIO  
DISP TAPE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
4
DISP IRIS  
You can select the following items to be displayed on the viewfinder  
screen on the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP 2 page.  
VF DISP 1 page  
Item  
Contents  
VF DISP  
ON or OFF of the viewfinder displaya)  
VF DISPLAY MODE Selecting the display modeb)  
DISP EXTENDER  
DISP FILTER  
DISP WHITE  
DISP GAIN  
Extender indicator  
Types of the ND filter  
White balance memory indicator  
Gain indicator  
DISP SHUTTER  
DISP AUDIO  
DISP TAPE  
Shutter speed and ECS mode indicator  
Audio level indicator  
Remaining tape indicator  
Iris opening indicator  
DISP IRIS  
a) The viewfinder display can be also turned on or off by pressing  
the DISPLAY switch on the viewfinder.  
b) For detailed information on the display mode, see 4-7-3 Display  
Mode and Setting Change and Adjustment Progress Messageson  
page 4-72.  
4-70 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
VF DISP 2 page  
Item  
Contents  
DISP ZOOM  
Zoom position indicator  
DISP COLOR TEMP Displays the color temperature  
DISP VOLTa)  
Displays the battery voltage of the DC IN  
connector.  
DISP WRR RF LVL Displays the reception level of the wireless  
microphone.  
DISP TIME CODE  
Displays the time code  
4
a) When an Anton Bauer Intelligent Battery System is used, the remaining  
battery capacity of the Anton Bauer Intelligent Battery is displayed  
numerically regardless of this setting.  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the item you want to  
set, and push the MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob whether the selected item should appear in  
the viewfinder display (the ONsetting), or not appear (the OFF”  
setting), and push the MENU knob.  
The z mark at the left of the selected item changes to the t mark  
and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z mark.  
Note that pushing the MENU CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to  
CANCEL/PRST on this page has no effect.  
5
6
To turn the setting of another item ON or OFF, repeat steps 3 and 4.  
To end menu operations, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen, and the display  
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top  
and bottom of the viewfinder screen (when the viewfinder  
DISPLAY switch is set to ON or the VF DISP item is set to ON on  
the VF DISP 1 page).  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-71  
4-7-3 Display Mode and Setting Change and  
Adjustment Progress Messages  
You can limit or suppress the messages that give details of setting  
changes and adjustment progress and results by setting a display mode.  
The conditions under which messages are displayed and their  
correspondence with the display mode are as follows:  
Setting change and adjustment progress messages and display modes  
Y: Message is displayed.  
N: Message is not displayed.  
4
Message  
Display mode  
setting  
Message  
display condition  
1
2
3
FILTER : n (where n = 1, 2, 3, 4) N  
N
Y
When the filter selection  
has been changed  
GAIN : n (where n = –3dB, 0dB, N  
3dB, 6dB, 9dB,12dB, 18dB,  
24dB, 30dB, 36dB, 42dB)  
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
When the gain setting has  
been changed  
WHITE : n (where n = A CH, B  
CH, PRESET) or ATW : RUN  
N
N
N
When the setting of the  
WHITE BAL switch has  
been changed  
DCC : ON (or OFF)  
When the OUTPUT/DCC  
selector has been set to  
DCC ON or OFF  
: SS : 1/100 (for the 59.94I  
format model) or 1/60 (for the  
50I format model) (or 1/125, 1/  
250,  
When the shutter speed  
and mode setting has been  
changed a)  
1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
ECS, EVS)  
4-72 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
Message  
display condition  
Message  
Display mode  
setting  
1
2
3
When the black or white  
E.g. WHITE : OK  
N
Y
Y
balance has been adjusted  
For more information, see  
Section 4-1 Adjusting the Black  
Balance and the White Balance”  
(page 4-1).  
4
a) This is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the SHUTTER selector is set to  
ON.  
Changing the display mode  
The currently set display mode appears on the VF DISP 1 page of the  
USER menu. Follow the procedure below to change it.  
1
2
Follow steps 1 to 2 in 4-7-2 Selecting the Display Items(page 4-  
69), until the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu is on the  
viewfinder screen.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to VF DISPLAY  
MODE, and push the MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob until the desired display mode appears, and  
push the MENU knob.  
The z mark at the left of the selected item changes to the t mark  
and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z mark.  
To end menu operations, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-73  
4-7-4 Setting the Marker Display  
Use the MARKER page of the USER menu to switch the display of the  
center and safety zone markers on or off and to select whether the area  
indicated by the safety zone marker is 80%, 90% or 100% of the screen  
area.  
Note  
When the HKDW-702 is installed and the NTSC viewfinder and/or the  
NTSC monitor are connected, all markers and zebra patterns are not  
displayed if DOWN CON MODE is set to CROP on the OUTPUT SEL  
page of the USER menu, even if the marker display is set to ON.  
4
CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE swtich  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
MENU knob  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended  
appears on the viewfinder screen.  
Turn the MENU knob until the MARKER page appears, and push  
the MENU knob.  
4-74 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
The current setting of an item appears to the right of the item.  
06 MARKER 1  
,MARKER  
CENTER  
CENTER MARK  
SAFETY ZONE  
SAFETY AREA  
ASPECT  
ASPECT SELECT  
ASPECT MASK  
ASPECT MASK LVL :  
100% MARKER  
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
3
OFF  
: 92.5%  
:
:
:
OFF  
4:3  
OFF  
0
:
OFF  
4
You can select displaying or not-displaying for the following item.  
Item  
Contents  
MARKER  
Not to display all markers, set to OFF.  
To display the center marker, set to ON.  
CENTER  
CENTER MARKER  
To select the type center marker (1 to 4),  
when CENTER is set to ON.  
SAFETY ZONE  
SAFETY AREA  
To display the safety zone, set to ON.  
To select the safety zone range (80%, 90%,  
92.5 % or 95 %), when SAFETY ZONE is set  
ON.  
ASPECT  
To display the aspect marker, set to ON.  
To select the aspect mode.  
ASPECT SELECT  
ASPECT MASK  
To make the areas out of the selected aspect  
marker dimmer, set to ON.  
ASPECT MASK LVL  
100 % MARKER  
To set the mask level (0 to 8), when the  
ASPECT MASK is set to ON  
To display the effective pixel area, set to ON.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-75  
3
Perform the settings for each item.  
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the item you  
want to set, and push MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z  
mark and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ?  
mark.  
4
2
Turn the MENU knob to change the desired setting, and push  
the MENU knob.  
The z mark at the left of the selected item changes to the t  
mark and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z  
mark.  
Note that the MENU CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE function can  
be used for the ASPECT MASK LVL item.  
If the MENU CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch is pressed  
twice to CANCEL/PRST before pushing the MENU knob in  
step 2, the previous setting is canceled. If the switch is pressed  
twice more to CANCEL/PRST, the setting is reset to its initial  
value.  
4
5
To continue setting other items, repeat step 3.  
To end menu operations, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen, and the display  
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top  
and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
4-76 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-7-5 Setting the Viewfinder  
Use the VF SETTING page of the USER menu to select items related to  
the viewfinder.  
4
CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE swtich  
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended  
appears on the viewfinder screen.  
Turn the MENU knob until the VF SETTING page appears, and  
push the MENU knob.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-77  
The VF SETTING page appears.  
The current setting of an item appears to the right of the item.  
08 VF SETTING  
,ZEBRA  
ZEBRA SELECT  
ZEBRA1 DET.LEVEL:  
ZEBRA2 DET.LEVEL:  
:
:
OFF  
1
0
0
ASPECT  
:
OFF  
VF DETAIL LEVEL :  
VF DTL H LEVEL  
VF DTL V LEVEL  
0
0
0
:
:
4
Item  
Content  
ZEBRA a)  
Turns the zebra display on or off.  
ZEBRA SELECT  
Selects ZEBRA 1, ZEBRA 2 or BOTH.  
ZEBRA 1 DET LEVEL Adjusts the level of the zebra 1 (70%) display.  
ZEBRA 2 DET LEVEL Adjusts the level of the zebra 2 (100%)  
display.  
ASPECT  
Turns the aspect MARKER display on or off.  
VF DETAIL LEVEL  
Adjusts the sharpness in the viewfinder (-99 to  
0 to 99). b)  
Turns the VF detail function on or off and  
adjusts the level.  
VF DTL H LEVEL  
VF DTL V LEVEL  
Adjusts the VF H detail. b) (-99 to 0 to 99).  
Adjusts the VF V detail. b) (-99 to 0 to 99).  
a) When you use the viewfinder which is not equipped with the  
ZEBRA switch, turns the display on or off using this item.  
When you use the viewfinder with the ZEBRA switch, the latest  
operation between the ZEBRA switch and this menu operation  
is effective.  
b) The sharpness setting in the viewfinder does not affect the  
recorded image.  
4-78 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the item you want to  
set, and push MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob to change the desired setting, and push the  
MENU knob.  
The z mark at the left of the selected item changes to the t mark  
and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z mark.  
4
5
6
To continue setting other items, repeat steps 3 and 4.  
To end menu operations, turn the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen, and the display  
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top  
and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-79  
4-7-6 Recording Superimposed Shot Data in  
Color Bars  
In the SHOT DISP. page of the USER menu, you can select which shot  
data is recorded superimposed on the color bars. You can also select  
which of the shot IDs (1 to 4) set in the SHOT DATA page is recorded  
superimposed on the picture.  
Use the following procedure.  
4
CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE swtich  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
MENU knob  
Selecting the shot data for superimposed recording  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended  
appears on the viewfinder screen.  
Turn the MENU knob until the SHOT DISP page appears, and push  
the MENU knob.  
4-80 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
The SHOT DISP page appears.  
The current setting of an item appears to the right of the item.  
11 SHOT DISP  
,SHOT DATE  
SHOT TIME  
SHOT MODEL NAME :  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
SHOT SERIAL NO  
SHOT ID SEL  
:
:
4
Item  
Content  
SHOT DATE  
Selects whether or not the shot data is  
superimposed (ON or OFF).  
SHOT TIME  
Selects whether or not shot time is superimposed  
(ON or OFF).  
SHOT MODEL Selects whether or not the model name is  
NAME superimposed (ON or OFF).  
SHOT SERIAL Selects whether or not the serial number is  
NO. superimposed (ON or OFF).  
SHOT ID SELa) Selects whether or not the shot ID set in the SHOT  
ID page is superimposed (1 to 4 or OFF).  
a) To carry out superimposed recording, select ON. Not to carry out  
superimposed recording, select OFF.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-81  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the item you want to  
set, and push MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob to select whether or not to record the selected  
item superimposed on the picture, and push the MENU knob.  
4
The z mark at the left of the selected item changes to the t mark  
and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z mark.  
5
6
To continue setting other items, repeat steps 3 and 4.  
To end menu operations, turn the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
To carry out superimposed recording  
To actually record the items selected for superimposed recording in the  
SHOT DISP. page, set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to BARS, DCC OFF.  
The items selected for superimposed recording appear in the viewfinder  
screen and are recorded superimposed on the picture.  
4-82 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-7-7 Setting the Shot ID  
In the SHOT ID page of the USER menu, you can set a shot ID of up to  
12 alphanumeric characters, spaces, and symbols.  
When the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to BARS, DCC OFF, this shot ID  
is output with the color bar signal. The shot ID comprises ID1 to ID4,  
and the setting can be changed using the SHOT DISP. page of the USER  
menu.  
Note  
4
When the menu is displayed, the shot ID is not displayed even if the  
color bar signal is output.  
Follow the procedure below to set the shot ID.  
CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE switch  
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
Setting the shot ID  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended  
appears on the viewfinder screen.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-83  
2
Turn the MENU knob until the SHOT ID page appears, and push the  
MENU knob.  
10 SHOT ID  
,ID-1 : SHOT-IS NAME  
ID-2 :  
ID-3 :  
ID-4 :  
4
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the ID (one of ID-1  
to ID-4) you want to set, and push MENU knob.  
The window for entering the shot ID appears.  
The r marks appear over the top of the character on the character  
entry row. You can now enter the characters (character setting  
mode).  
ID-1  
ESC  
m
SHOT-IS NAME  
END  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW  
XYZ 0123456789 !#$%&()*+  
,-./:;<=>?@  
RET INS DEL  
4-84 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4
Enter or change the shot ID.  
When you enter the shot ID first, go to step 2.  
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the r mark to the character  
which you want to change, then push the MENU knob.  
The r mark changes to the ? mark and the character table  
appears.  
The r mark moves to the character table.  
4
ID-1  
ESC  
?
SHOT-IS NAME  
END  
m
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW  
XYZ 0123456789 !#$%&()*+  
,-./:;<=>?@  
RET INS DEL  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-85  
2
Turn the MENU knob until the r mark moves to the character  
position that you want to select, then push the MENU knob.  
Example: To change the Sto D”  
ID-1  
ESC  
Move the r mark  
to D.  
?
SHOT-ID NAME  
END  
D appears under  
the ? mark.  
m
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW  
4
XYZ 0123456789 !#$%&()*+  
,-./:;<=>?@  
RET INS DEL  
ID-1  
ESC  
Push the MENU  
knob.  
m
SHOT-ID NAME  
END  
The ? mark  
changes to the r  
mark.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW  
XYZ 0123456789 !#$%&()*+  
,-./:;<=>?@  
RET INS DEL  
4-86 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
To enter a space  
Move the r mark over the INS, then push the MENU knob. The  
space is entered in the position under the ? mark on the character  
entry row.  
When there is a character under the ? mark, the space is entered in  
that position, and that and subsequent characters move to the right  
one at a time.  
ID-1  
ESC  
4
?
SHOT-IDNAME  
END  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW  
XYZ 0123456789 !#$%&()*+  
Move the r mark over  
INS.  
m
RET INS DEL  
,-./:;<=>?@  
Push the MENU  
knob.  
ID-1  
?
SHOT-ID NAME  
ESC  
END  
Space  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW  
XYZ 0123456789 !#$%&()*+  
m
RET INS DEL  
,-./:;<=>?@  
Move the r mark over RET, then push the MENU knob. The ? mark  
over the space on the character entry row changes to the r mark.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-87  
To delete a character  
Move the r mark over DEL, then push the MENU knob. The  
character under the ? mark is deleted and the subsequent characters  
move to the left one at a time.  
To cancel deleting the character  
Move the r mark over RET, then push the MENU knob. The ? mark  
on the character entry row changes to the r mark.  
4 5  
Repeat step 4 to enter remaining characters.  
6
When you finish entering characters, turn the MENU knob to move  
the r mark over END, then push the MENU knob.  
The character setting mode is cleared and the SHOT ID page  
appears.  
To cancel entering or changing shot ID  
Before performing step 6 operations, move the t mark to ESC at top  
right of the window, then push the MENU knob.  
All changes or entered characters are discarded and the SHOT ID page  
appears.  
4-88 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-7-8 Displaying the Status Confirmation  
Windows  
You can confirm the settings or status of the camcorder on the  
viewfinder screen by displaying the following windows.  
ABNORMAL <!> window  
FUNCTION window  
AUDIO STATUS window  
ABNORMAL <!> window  
4
ABNORMAL<!>  
!GAIN  
!SHUTTER  
WHT PRESET : ON  
:
:
ON 12dB  
ON  
EVS  
WB  
OFF  
OFF  
2
ATW RUN  
EXTENDER  
!FILTER  
:
:
ON  
ON  
: OFF  
ON  
OVERRIDE  
:
0
This window allows you to confirm why the (warning) indicator  
lights.  
You can use the !LED page of the USER menu to set whether or not  
the (warning) indicator lights.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-89  
FUNCTION window  
FUNCTION  
ASSIGN SW <1>  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
: EZ-FC  
: F.MIC  
LOOP REC : OFF : 0SEC  
- Actual State ---------  
REAR BNC :  
TEST OUT :  
HD SDI  
OFF  
HD  
OFF  
:
4
This window allows you to confirm the assigned function of the  
ASSIGN 1/2 switches, ON/OFF of the Loop Rec function, ON/OFF of  
the output and the output signal of BNC connectors (HD SDI connector,  
VBS/SDI OUT connector and TEST OUT connectors).  
AUDIO STATUS window  
AUDIO STATUS  
EMPHASYS:OFF NDF STEREO  
CH1:FRONT  
CH2:REAR  
CH3:WIRELES  
CH4:WIRELES  
40 30  
CH1:  
CH2:  
20  
10  
0
0V  
CH3:  
CH4:  
This window allows you to confirm the following items related to audio.  
ON/OFF of EMPHASIS, setting conditions of DF/NDF (only for the  
59.94I format model) and FRONT MIC MONO/STEREO  
Type of input signal to audio channels CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4  
Input level of audio channels CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4  
4-90 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
Display/dont display status confirmation windows  
You can use the SET STATUS page of the USER menu to set whether or  
not the status confirmation windows are displayed.  
To display the status confirmation windows  
You can use the MENU CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch as the  
STATUS ON/SEL / OFF switch when the MENU ON/OFF switch is set  
to OFF (when the cover is closed, OFF is automatically selected).  
4
By pushing the STATUS ON/SEL / OFF  
switch up to ON/SEL, the confirmation  
window appears.  
ON/SEL  
STATUS  
Each time you push this switch up to  
ON/SEL, the window switches. After  
10 seconds, the window disappears  
automatically.  
OFF  
To disappear the window promptly  
after displaying the window, push this  
switch down to OFF.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-91  
To disable display of the status confirmation windows  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended  
appears on the viewfinder screen.  
2
Turn the MENU knob until the SET STATUS page appears, and  
push the MENU knob.  
4
The SET STATUS page appears.  
The current setting of an item appears to the right of the item.  
12 SET STATUS  
,STATUS ABNORMAL :  
STATUS FUNTION  
STATUS AUDIO  
ON  
ON  
ON  
:
:
Item  
Content  
ABNORMAL  
Selects whether or not the ABNORMAL window is  
displayed (ON or OFF).  
FUNCTION  
Selects whether or not the FUNCTION window is  
displayed (ON or OFF).  
STATUS AUDIO Selects whether or not the STATUS AUDIO window  
is displayed (ON or OFF).  
4-92 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the item you want to  
set, and push MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob to select whether or not to DISPLAY the  
selected window, then push the MENU knob.  
The z mark at the left of the selected item changes to the t mark  
and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z mark.  
4
5
6
To continue setting other windows, repeat steps 3 and 4.  
To end menu operations, turn the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
4-7-9 Confirming the Image of the Return Video  
Signal on the Viewfinder  
You can set whether or not the image of the return video signal is  
displayed on the viewfinder, using the GENLOCK page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu.  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while pushing the MENU  
knob.  
The TOP menu appears.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-93  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to MAINTENANCE,  
then push the MENU knob.  
When the MAINTENANCE menu is first used, the CONTENTS  
page appears.  
Or if you used the MAINTENANCE menu already, the page that  
was on the screen when the last MAINTENANCE menu operation  
ended appears on the viewfinder screen.  
When the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU knob to  
move t mark to GENLOCK, then push the MENU knob.  
When any page of the MAINTENANCE menu is displayed, turn the  
MENU knob until the GENLOCK page appears, then push the  
MENU knob.  
4
The GENLOCK page appears, and the current settings are displayed  
on the page.  
? 15 GENLOCK  
GENLOCK  
RETURN VIDEO  
:
:
ON  
OFF  
GL H PHASE COASE:  
GL H PHASE FINE :  
0
0
4-94 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4
Perform the following setting.  
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to GENLOCK, and  
push the MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of GENLOCK setting changes to the z  
mark and the z mark at the left of GENLOCK setting changes  
to the ? mark.  
2
Turn the MENU knob until OFF appears, then push the MENU  
knob.  
4
The z mark at the left of GENLOCK changes to the t mark  
and the ? mark at the left of GENLOCK setting changes to the  
z mark.  
And the setting is executed.  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to RETURN  
VIDEO, and push the MENU knob.  
The t mark changes to the z mark and the t mark changes  
to the ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob until ON appears, then push the MENU  
knob.  
The z mark changes to the t mark and the ? mark changes to  
the z mark.  
And the setting is executed.  
5
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
(When you close the cover, the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to  
OFF automatically.)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-95  
To see the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder  
screen  
Press the RET switch on the lens. The image of the return video signal is  
displayed on the viewfinder screen while you are pressing the RETURN  
switch on the lens.  
When the RETURN VIDEO function is assigned to the ASSIGN 1  
switch, you can see the image of the return video signal on the  
viewfinder screen while you are pressing the ASSIGN 1 switch even if  
RETURN VIDEO is set to OFF on the GENLOCK page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu.  
4
Note  
When any signal is not input to the GENLOCK IN connector, the image  
is not changed even if you press the RET switch on the lens.  
However, the image is switched while you are pressing the ASSIGN 1  
switch to which the RETURN VIDEO function is assigned, even if any  
signal is not input to the GENLOCK IN connector.  
4-96 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-8 Adjustments and Settings  
from Menus  
The camcorder provides menus for adjustments and settings.  
4-8-1 Setting the GAIN Selector Values  
Before using the camcorder, use the GAIN SW page of the USER menu  
to set the gains corresponding to the L, M, and H positions of the GAIN  
selector, which switches the gain of the video amplifier.  
4
Follow the procedure below to set the gain.  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended  
appears on the viewfinder screen.  
2
Turn the MENU knob until the GAIN SW page appears, and push  
the MENU knob.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-97  
The GAIN SW page appears.  
The current setting of an item appears to the right of the item.  
07 GAIN SW  
,GAIN LOW  
GAIN MID  
GAIN HIGH  
GAIN TURBO  
:
:
:
:
0dB  
6dB  
12dB  
42dB  
TURBO SW IND  
:
OFF  
4
Item  
Content  
GAIN LOW  
Sets the gain value corresponding to the L position  
of the GAIN selector.  
GAIN MID  
Sets the gain value corresponding to the M position  
of the GAIN selector.  
GAIN HIGH  
Sets the gain value corresponding to the H position  
of the GAIN selector.  
GAIN TURBO Sets the gain value corresponding to TURBO GAIN  
button selection.  
TURBO  
SW IND  
OFF: When you operate the GAIN switch after  
pressing the TURBO GAIN button once, the  
video gain is changed according to the GAIN switch  
operation.  
ON: When the video gain is boosted to the video  
gain to the value preset by pressing the TURBO  
GAIN button once, the video gain is not changed  
even if you operate the GAIN switch if you do not  
press the TURBO GAIN button once more.  
4-98 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the item you want to  
set, and push MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob to change the desired setting, and push the  
MENU knob.  
The z mark at the left of the selected item changes to the t mark  
and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z mark.  
4
Any of 3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36 or 42 dB can be set for each  
of the L, M, and H positions, in any sequence.  
For TURBO, any of 3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36 or 42 dB can be  
selected.  
To change the gain corresponding to another switch position, return  
to step 3.  
5
To end menu operations, turn the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen and the display  
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top  
and bottom of the viewfinder.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-99  
4-8-2 Selecting the Output Signals  
The OUTPUT SEL page of the USER menu allows you to select the type  
of video signals from the VBS/SDI OUT connector and the TEST OUT  
connector (these settings are effective only when the HKDW-702 is  
installed). You can also set whether or not the video signal is output from  
the HD SDI OUT connector.  
Follow the procedure below to select the output signal.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
4
The page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended  
appears on the viewfinder screen.  
Turn the MENU knob until the OUTPUT SEL page appears, and  
push the MENU knob.  
The OUTPUT SEL page appears.  
The current setting of an item appears to the right of the item.  
01 OUTPUT SEL  
,HD SDI OUT  
:
OFF  
REAR BNC OUT SEL:  
TEST OUT SELECT :  
DOWN CON MODE  
OFF  
HD  
: LETTR  
4-100 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
Item  
Content  
HD SDI OUT  
Sets whether or not the video signal is output  
from the HD SDI OUT connector. When OFF  
is selected, the HD SDI circuit is  
disconnected, which saves power.  
REAR BNC OUT  
SELa)  
Selects the type of the video signal to be  
output from the VBS/SDI OUT connector (one  
of VBS/SDIb) /OFF). When OFF is selected,  
the down converter stops. This saves power.c)  
TEST OUT SELECT a) Selects the type of the video signal to be  
output from the TEST OUT connector. When  
HD is selected, the HD-Y signal is output.  
When SD is selected, the down-converted  
color composite signal is output. d)  
4
DOWN CON MODE a) Selects the conversion mode of the down  
converter among SQUZE, LETER and CROP.  
SQUZE: The picture is displayed without  
distortion on a monitor with the 16:9 aspect  
ratio. On a monitor with the 4:3 aspect ratio,  
the picture is distorted horizontally.  
LETER: Displays the picture without distortion  
on a monitor with the 4:3 aspect ratio, the  
video signal of the 16:9 aspect ratio is output  
by adding a blank area (no signal, black) top  
and bottom.  
CROPe): Cropping both the left and right sides  
of a video image with the 16:9 aspect ratio, a  
video signal with the 4:3 aspect ratio is output.  
a) When the HKDW-702 (not supplied) is not installed, these  
items are not displayed on the OUTPUT SEL page.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-101  
b) When SDI is selected, connect the VBS/SDI OUT connector to  
the SDI IN connector of the monitor.  
When VBS is selected, connect the VBS/SDI OUT connector to  
the VIDEO IN connector of the monitor.  
c) If you connect the TEST OUT connector to the monitor by  
setting TEST OUT SELECT to SD, the down converter  
automatically operates even if REAR BNC OUT SEL is set to  
OFF.  
d) When no picture is displayed on the monitor with the TEST  
OUT connector feeding the monitor, make sure the type of  
monitor (HD monitor / NTSC/PAL monitor) and the signal  
format of the output signal of the camcorder (1080i / 525i/625i)  
match.  
4
e) When the NTSC/PAL viewfinder or NTSC/PAL monitor is  
connected, the markers and zebra patterns are not displayed  
when CROP is selected.  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the item you want to  
set, and push MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob to change the desired setting, and push the  
MENU knob.  
The z mark at the left of the selected item changes to the t mark  
and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z mark.  
5
6
To continue the setting of another output signal, repeat steps 3 and  
4.  
To end menu operations, turn the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
4-102 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-8-3 Setting the Color Temperature Manually  
You can adjust the value of the white balance manually by setting the  
color temperature.  
The WHITE page of the PAINT menu allows you to do this setting.  
1
Follow the procedure of steps 1 to 3 described in 4-7-9 Confirming  
the Image of the Return Video Signal on the Viewfinderon page 4-  
93 to display the WHITE page of the PAINT menu.  
4
The WHITE page appears.  
The current setting of an item appears to the right of the item.  
02 WHITE  
,COLOR TEMP. <A>: 3200  
COLOR FINE  
R GAIN  
B GAIN  
<A>:  
<A>:  
<A>:  
0
0
0
COLOR TEMP. <B>: 3200  
COLOR FINE  
R GAIN  
B GAIN  
<B>:  
<B>:  
<B>:  
0
0
0
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-103  
Item  
Content  
COLOR TEMP <A> Sets the color temperature for the desired value.  
Adjust the value while looking at the real image  
because error tends to be bigger for adjustment  
of high color temperature.  
COLOR FINE <A> Adjusts the value more precisely when the color  
temperature adjustment through COLOR TEMP  
is not satisfactory.  
R GAIN <A>  
B GAIN <A>  
Only the value of R GAIN is changed.  
Only the value of B GAIN is changed.  
4
The above table shows the adjustment of the white balance of  
channel A.  
The items to which <B> is attached are used to adjust the white  
balance of channel B.  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the item you want to  
set, and push MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob to change the desired setting, and push the  
MENU knob.  
The z mark at the left of the selected item changes to the t mark  
and the question mark at the left of the setting changes to the z  
mark.  
4
5
To continue another setting, repeat steps 2 and 3.  
To end menu operations, turn the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
4-104 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-8-4 Specifying an Offset for the Auto White  
Balance Setting  
By setting an offset for the value of auto white balance, you can make  
the picture warmer or colder.  
The OFFSET WHT page of the OPERATION menu allows you to do  
this setting.  
1
Follow the procedure of steps 1 to 3 described in 4-7-9 Confirming  
the Image of the Return Video Signal on the Viewfinderon page 4-  
93 to display the OFFSET WHT page of the OPERATION menu.  
4
The OFFSET WHT page appears.  
The current setting of an item appears to the right of the item.  
16 OFFSET WHT  
,OFFSET WHITE <A>:  
WARM COOL <A>: 3200  
COLOR FINE  
OFF  
<A>:  
0
OFFSET WHITE <B>:  
WARM COOL  
COLOR FINE  
OFF  
<B>: 3200  
<B>:  
0
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-105  
Item  
Content  
OFFSET WHITE <A> Turns the setting of the offset for channel A  
ON or OFF. ON: Adds the offset adjusted on  
this page to the white balance  
WARM-COOL <A>  
Sets the offset for the white balance of  
channel A, using the color temperature.  
Adjust the value while looking at the real  
image because error tends to be bigger for  
adjustment of high color temperature.  
4
COLOR FINE <A>  
Adjusts the value more precisely if the  
adjustment by WARM-COOL <A> is not  
satisfactory.  
OFFSET WHITE <B> Turns the setting of the offset for channel B  
ON or OFF. ON: Adds the offset adjusted on  
this page to the white balance  
WARM-COOL <B>  
Sets the offset for the white balance of  
channel B, using the color temperature.  
Adjust the value while looking at the real  
image because error tends to be bigger for  
adjustment of high color temperature.  
COLOR FINE <B>  
Adjusts the value more precisely if the  
adjustment by WARM-COOL <B> is not  
satisfactory.  
2
Set the WHITE BAL switch to the position corresponding to the  
desired channel (A or B).  
Note  
If the WHITE BAL switch is not set to A or B when you operate the  
camcorder, the adjustment value will not be reflected in the output  
signal.  
4-106 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the item you want to  
set, and push MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob to change the desired setting, and push the  
MENU knob.  
The z mark at the left of the selected item changes to the t mark  
and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z mark.  
4
5
6
To continue another setting , repeat steps 3 and 4.  
To continue the settings of the other white balance channel, go back  
to step 2.  
To end menu operations, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-107  
4-8-5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1/2  
Switches  
You can assign the desired function to ASSIGN 1 and 2 switches.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended  
appears on the viewfinder screen.  
4
Turn the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page appears, and  
push the MENU knob.  
The FUNCTION 1 page appears.  
The current setting of an item appears to the right of the item.  
02 FUNCTION1  
, ASSIGN SW <1>  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
:kEZ-FC  
: F.MIC  
FRONT MIC SELECT: MONO  
DF/NDF  
END SEARCH  
:
:
DF  
OFF  
LOOP /INTVAL REC:  
LOOP REC TIME  
OFF  
0SEC  
:
Item  
Content  
ASSIGN SW 1 Assigns the function to ASSIGN 1 (push-type) switch.  
ASSIGN SW 2 Assigns the function to ASSIGN 2 (slide-type) switch.  
4-108 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to either ASSIGN SW 1  
or 2 to which you want to assign the function, and push MENU  
knob.  
The ASS <1> or <2> SEL window corresponding to the selected  
switch appears.  
ASS <1> SEL window  
ASS <1> SEL  
m
,00.OFF  
01.F.MIC MONO STEREO  
02.LOOP REC ON/OFF  
03.TEST OUT CHRACTER  
04.MARKER  
ESC  
Scrolls up or down  
on the window.  
m
4
05.EZ FOCUS  
06.RE-TAKE  
07.ATW  
08.RETURN VIDEO  
09.LENS RET  
ASS <2> SEL window  
ASS <2> SEL  
,00.OFF  
ESC  
01.F.MIC MONO STEREO  
02.LOOP REC ON/OFF  
03.TEST OUT CHRACTER  
04.MARKER  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-109  
Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 1 (push-type) switch  
Function  
Content  
OFF  
Disables the switch.  
F.MIC MONO STEREO Assigns the monaural/stereo switch  
function when the stereo microphone is  
connected to the MIC IN connector.  
LOOP REC ON/OFF  
Assigns the Loop Rec mode ON or OFF  
function.a)  
4
TEST OUT CHARACTER Assigns the function to switch whether or  
not the characters are mixed to the video  
signal to be output from the TEST OUT  
connector.  
MARKER  
EZ FOCUS  
RE-TAKE  
ATW  
Assigns the ON/OFF function to display all  
markers.b)  
Assigns the ON/OFF function of the EZ  
FOCUS c) function.  
Assigns the RE-TAKE function to the  
switch.  
Assigns the ON/OFF function of auto-  
tracing white balance.  
RETURN VIDEO  
Assigns the ON/OFF function to display the  
image of the return video signal on the  
viewfinder to the switch.d)  
LENS RET  
Assigns the same function as that of the  
RET switch on the lens to the switch.  
REC BUTTON  
TURBO BUTTON  
Assigns the VTR S/S (start/stop) function  
to the switch.  
Assigns the turbo gain function to the  
switch.  
a) When the HKDW-703 is not installed, even though you can  
assign this function to the ASSIGN 1 switch on the ASS <1>  
SEL window, the ASSIGN 1 switch does not work.  
4-110 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
b) Even when MARKER is set to OFF on the MARKER page of  
the USER menu, the ASSIGN 1 switch allows you to display or  
not to display all markers.  
c) EZ FOCUS  
When EZ FOCUS is set to ON, the iris stays open and the video  
level is automatically adjusted to the proper level by the  
electronic shutter when an excessive amount of light passes  
through the lens. The depth of field is shallow because the iris  
stays open, and it is easy to check whether the object is in clear  
focus.  
Pressing the switch again sets the EZ FOCUS function to OFF.  
This function automatically returns to OFF about 10 seconds  
after being set to ON.  
4
d) Even if RETURN VIDEO is set to OFF on the GENLOCK page  
of the MAINTENANCE menu, you can use this switch to  
display the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder.  
Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 2 (slide-type) switch  
Function  
Content  
OFF  
Disables the switch.  
F.MIC MONO STEREO Assigns the monaural/stereo switch  
function when the stereo microphone is  
connected to the MIC IN connector.  
LOOP REC ON/OFF  
Assigns the Loop Rec mode ON or OFF  
function.  
TEST OUT CHARACTER Assigns the function to switch whether or  
not the characters are mixed to the video  
signal to be output from the TEST OUT  
connector.  
MARKER  
Assigns the ON/OFF function to display all  
markers.a)  
a) Even when MARKER is set to OFF on the MARKER page of  
the USER menu, the ASSIGN 2 switch allows you to display or  
not to display all markers.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-111  
Note  
For functions that are assigned to the ASSIGN 2 switch, you cannot  
change those settings using other menus. The function assigned to  
ASSIGN 2 switch takes precedence over the menu setting.  
4
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the item you want to  
set, and push MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
4
Turn the MENU knob to change the desired setting, and push the  
MENU knob.  
The z mark at the left of the selected item changes to the t mark  
and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z mark.  
To continue another setting, repeat steps 3 and 4.  
To return to the FUNCTION 1 page  
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to ESC on the right top of  
the window and push the MENU knob.  
Or push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE  
side.  
To end menu operations  
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
4-112 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-8-6 Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock  
You can set or change the date and time of the internal clock. The date  
and time set are stored in the time code.  
1
Follow the procedure of steps 1 to 3 described in 4-7-9 Confirming  
the Image of the Return Video Signal on the Viewfinderon page 4-  
93 to display the TIME/DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu.  
02 TIME/DATE  
4
,
ADJUST  
:
EXEC  
HOUR  
MIN  
SEC  
:
:
:
12  
55  
58  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
:
:
:
00  
07  
31  
The t mark is placed at ADJUST.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-113  
2
Push the MENU knob.  
The TIME ADJUST setting window appears.  
TIME ADJUST  
HOUR  
MIN  
SEC  
:
:
:
12  
55  
58  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
:
:
:
00  
07  
31  
4
OK  
Item  
Contents  
HOUR  
MIN  
Sets the hour value.  
Sets the minutes value.  
Sets the seconds value.  
Sets the year.  
SEC  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
Sets the month.  
Sets the day.  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the item you want to  
set, and push MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
4-114 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4
Turn the MENU knob to display the desired value, and push the  
MENU knob.  
The z mark at the left of the selected item changes to the t mark  
and the ? mark at the left of the setting changes to the z mark.  
5
6
To continue the remaining settings, repeat steps 3 and 4.  
To end menu operations, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
4
The internal clock is set with the date and time set in steps 3 to 5.  
The TIME/DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears again.  
The time set on the TIME ADJUST setting window is displayed.  
To cancel the setting  
Before performing the operation in step 6, move the t mark to ESC on  
the right top of the window and push the MENU knob.  
Or push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE  
side.  
All settings or changes are discarded and the TIME/DATE page of the  
DIAGNOSIS menu appears.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-115  
4-8-7 Selecting the Lens File  
The LENS FILE page of the USER menu allows you to change the lens  
file according to the lens in use.  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended  
appears on the viewfinder screen.  
4
2
Turn the MENU knob until the LENS FILE page appears, and push  
the MENU knob.  
The LENS FILE page appears.  
The name and the f-stop (iris setting) of the lens currently selected  
appears.  
14 LENS FILE  
,LENS FILE SELECT:  
1
F.ID :  
F STOP  
:
1.7  
4-116 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to LENS FILE  
SELECT, and push MENU knob.  
The t mark at the left of the selected item changes to the z mark  
and the z mark at the left of the setting changes to the ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob until the lens file No. in use appears, and push  
the MENU knob.  
The z mark changes to the t mark and the ? mark at the left of the  
lens No. changes to the z mark.  
4
The selected lens file is loaded.  
Not to use the lens file:  
Select OFF.  
5
To end menu operations, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen, and the display  
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top  
and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-117  
4-9 Saving/Loading User  
Menu Data to/from  
Memory Stick  
The camcorder is equipped with a memory stick drive, which enables  
you to save the user file, scene files, lens files, reference files and ALL  
files.  
This section explains how to handle the memory stick and save/load a  
user file to/from the memory stick.  
For detailed information on the scene file, see 4-11 Using the Scene Fileson  
page 4-135.  
4
For detailed information on the lens files, reference files and ALL files, refer to the  
Maintenance Manual.  
4-9-1 Handling the Memory Stick  
The memory stick can be inserted or removed from the camcorder with  
the power turned on or off.  
Inserting the memory stick  
1
Push the MEMORY STICK OPEN button.  
The cover of the memory stick compartment opens.  
MEMORY STICK OPEN button  
4-118 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
2
Hold the memory stick with the notch facing downward and the  
arrow facing toward you, and insert the memory stick into the  
memory stick insertion slot until it clicks into place. Then, close the  
cover.  
4
Memory stick  
Inserting the memory stick.  
Note  
If it does not fit into the slot properly or if there is some resistance when  
you insert it, the memory stick may be turned around or upside down. Do  
not force the memory stick into the slot. Confirm the direction of the  
notch and arrow on the memory stick before inserting the memory stick,  
and then try inserting it again.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-119  
Removing the memory stick  
Open the cover of the memory stick compartment.  
Push the eject button after confirming that the BUSY indicator (access  
indicator) is not lit. The memory stick pops out.  
4
EJECT button  
BUSY indicator  
MEMORY STICK OPEN button  
Removing the memory stick  
Note  
Do not remove the memory stick while the BUSY indicator is lit, the  
camcorder is reading or writing data on the memory stick.  
Protecting saved data  
To prevent accidental erasure of important setup data, use the write  
protect switch on the memory stick.  
Slide the switch right to the write protect position. It is now impossible  
to write or delete data on the memory stick.  
4-120 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
LOCK  
Write protect switch on the memory stick  
4
Notes on using and storing the memory stick  
Avoid touching the connector of the memory stick or contacting it with  
a metal object.  
When attaching a label to the memory stick, use only the label supplied  
for the memory stick.  
Do not drop, bend, or submit the memory stick to external shock.  
Do not disassemble or modify the memory stick.  
Avoid getting liquids on the memory stick.  
Avoid using or storing the memory stick in a location subject to:  
extremely high temperature such as the hot inside of a car or the  
outdoors exposed to a burning sun, or a place near a heater  
direct sunlight  
high humidity  
excessive dust  
When storing and carrying the memory stick, keep it in its original case  
to ensure protection of important data.  
When carrying the camcorder with the memory stick inserted, close the  
cover.  
Avoid removing the memory stick from the insertion slot while the  
BUSY indicator is lit.  
Do not format the memory stick using a PC.  
The MEMORY STICK page of the FILE menu allows you to format  
the memory stick.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-121  
4-9-2 Saving/Loading User Menu Data to/from  
Memory Stick  
The section explains the operations to save data to and load it from the  
memory stick. Operations are done from the USER FILE page of the  
USER menu.  
You can recreate suitable setup condition rapidly using data in the  
memory stick.  
Saving data to the memory stick  
You can save up to 100 user files in the memory stick.  
4
Insert the memory stick, then follow the procedure below.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended  
appears on the viewfinder screen.  
Turn the MENU knob until the USER FILE page appears, and push  
the MENU knob.  
USER FILE page  
4-122 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
If you want to set a file ID for the data to be saved, set the file ID  
before going to the step 3.  
For detailed information on setting the file ID, see Setting the file IDon  
page 4-130.  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to USER FILE SAVE,  
and push MENU knob.  
The P00 USER SAVE window appears.  
4
?P00 USER SAVE  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
001.NEW FILE  
002.NEW FILE  
003.NEW FILE  
004.NEW FILE  
005.NEW FILE  
The ? mark is displayed to the left of P00 at the top left of the  
window. In this case, you can change the page. You can use up to 20  
pages, from P00 to P19, to save user files in the memory stick. Each  
page can hold up to 5 files.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-123  
4
Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file  
number appears, and push MENU knob.  
When P00 page is selected  
P00 USER SAVE  
ESC  
ALL  
,DISPLAY MODE  
:
By pushing the MENU  
knob when the ? mark  
is placed at the left of  
P00, the t mark  
moves to DISPLAY  
MODE.  
001.NEW FILE  
002.NEW FILE  
003.NEW FILE  
004.NEW FILE  
005.NEW FILE  
4
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the desired file No.,  
and push MENU knob.  
P00 USER SAVE  
MEMOR YSTICK ACCESS  
ESC  
The file number  
indicated as NEW FILE  
is vacant.  
The file number where  
data already has been  
saved, the file name is  
displayed.  
DISPLAY MODE  
:
ALL  
,001.NEW FILE  
002.NEW FILE  
003.NEW FILE  
004.NEW FILE  
005.NEW FILE  
The message MEMORY STICK ACCESS appears and the BUSY  
indicator is on.  
The setting data is saved in the memory stick as the user file.  
When the saving is completed, the message COMPLETE!appears  
and the BUSY indicator also goes off.  
4-124 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
If no memory stick has been inserted, the message NO MEMORY  
STICKwill appear. Insert a memory stick.  
When you select the file number where the data has been saved  
The message OVERWRITE OK YES NOappears. In this case,  
the t mark is placed at the left of NO, and NO blinks.  
To stop overwriting, press the MENU knob.  
To overwrite, move the t mark to YES (YES blinks) and push the  
MENU knob.  
4
You can select the contents of the user file to be displayed on the  
page.  
For details, see Selecting the display contentson page 4-132.  
To cancel the saving and return to the USER FILE page  
Before pushing the MENU knob in step 5, move the t mark to  
ESC at the right top of the window by turning the MENU knob and  
push the MENU knob.  
The USER FILE page appears again and the t mark is placed at  
the USER FILE SAVE item.  
6
To end menu operations, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen, and the display  
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top  
and bottom of the viewfinder screen.  
USER menu settings to be saved in the memory stick  
Settings for items on all pages of the USER menu are saved in the  
memory stick as a user file. However, you can select the settings which  
are not to be saved in the memory stick.  
For details, see the Maintenance Manual.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-125  
If data cannot be saved  
If one of the following error messages appears when you push the  
MENU knob in step 5 of the procedure in the previous section (page 4-  
124), then the data was not saved.  
Data save error messages  
Error message  
Action  
Reason  
NO MEMORY  
STICK  
Insert or reinsert the memory  
stick.  
No memory stick is  
inserted.  
4
MEMORY STICK  
LOCKED  
Set the write protect switch  
to the write enable position.  
The write protect switch on  
the memory stick is set to  
the write protect position.  
MEMORY STICK  
ERROR (flashing)  
Check the circuitry, or  
replace the memory stick .  
Circuit or memory stick  
fault.  
Loading saved data from a memory stick  
Follow the procedure below.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended  
appears on the viewfinder screen.  
Turn the MENU knob until the USER FILE page appears, and push  
the MENU knob.  
4-126 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to USER FILE LOAD,  
and push MENU knob.  
The P00 USER LOAD window appears.  
?P00 USER LOAD  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
001.USER1  
002.USER2  
003.NO FILE  
004.USER4  
005.USER5  
00/08/01  
00/08/10  
4
00/09/20  
00/10/03  
4
Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file  
No appears, and push MENU knob.  
When P00 page is selected  
P00 USER LOAD  
,DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
By pushing the MENU  
knob when the ? mark  
is placed at the left of  
P00, the t mark  
moves to DISPLAY  
MODE.  
001.USER1  
002.USER2  
003.NO FILE  
004.USER4  
005.USER5  
00/08/01  
00/08/10  
00/09/20  
00/10/03  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-127  
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the desired file  
number to be loaded, and push MENU knob.  
P00 USER LOAD  
MEMORY STICK ACCESS  
ESC  
DISPLAY MODE  
:
ALL  
001.USER1  
,002.USER2  
003.NO FILE  
004.USER4  
005.USER5  
00/08/01  
00/08/10  
00/09/20  
00/10/03  
4
The message MEMORY STICK ACCESS appears and the BUSY  
indicator is on.  
The setting data is loaded in the camcorder from the memory stick.  
When the loading is completed, the message COMPLETE!”  
appears and the BUSY indicator also goes off.  
Note  
The data loaded from the memory stick overwrite the data saved in  
the camcorder.  
To cancel the loading and return to the USER FILE page  
Before pushing the MENU knob in step 5, move the t mark to  
ESC at the right top of the window by turning the MENU knob and  
push the MENU knob.  
The USER FILE page appears again and the t mark is placed at  
the USER FILE LOAD item.  
6
To end menu operations, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
4-128 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
If data cannot be loaded  
If one of the following error messages appears when you push the  
MENU knob in step 5 (on page 4-128), then the data was not loaded.  
Data load error messages  
Reason  
Action  
Error message  
No memory stick is  
inserted.  
Insert or reinsert the  
memory stick.  
NO MEMORY  
STICK  
Circuit or memory stick  
fault.  
Recheck, and consult a  
Sony representative.  
MEMORY STICK  
ERROR (flashing)  
4
The memory stick contains  
data that cannot be loaded  
with this camcorder.  
Do not try to load data  
saved with another  
camcorder.  
FILE ERROR  
(flashing)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-129  
Setting the File ID  
When data is saved in a memory stick, it is useful to set a file ID for the  
memory stick to identify it.  
When data is saved to a memory stick, a file ID is saved to the memory  
stick together with the data.  
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to F. ID on the USER  
FILE page.  
4
2
Push the MENU knob.  
The F. ID window where you can set the file ID appears.  
F.ID  
ESC  
m
END  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW  
XYZ 0123456789 !#$%&()*+  
,-./:;<=>?@  
RET INS DEL  
4-130 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
3
4
Follow the procedure of steps 4 and 5 described in 4-7-7 Setting the  
Shot IDon page 4-83 to enter the file ID.  
Note  
Execute the file ID before saving data in the memory stick.  
Otherwise, the file ID is not saved with the other data.  
When you finish entering the file ID, turn the MENU knob to move  
the r mark to END, then push the MENU knob.  
4
The USER FILE page appears.  
File ID set in step 3  
Perform operations from step 3 in Saving data to the memory stick”  
on page 4-122.  
This file ID is stored in the memory stick with data.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-131  
Selecting the display contents  
You can select the contents of the file to be displayed on the USER  
SAVE window and USER LOAD window.  
1
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to DISPLAY MODE,  
and push the MENU knob.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the type of the  
display contents, and push the MENU knob.  
4
P00 USER SAVE  
,DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
F.ID  
:
001.USER1  
002.USER2  
003.NO FILE  
004.USER4  
005.USER5  
Item  
ALL  
Contents  
File ID (10 characters) and store date (year/month/date)  
File ID (16 characters)  
F.ID  
DATE  
Store date (year/month/date/hours/minutes/seconds)  
4-132 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-10 Resetting USER Menu  
Settings to the Standard  
Settings  
You can clear all current settings for items of the USER menu and return  
settings to the standard settings (factory settings or preset settings).  
When you first use the camcorder, the standard settings are the same as  
the factory settings. You can change them. The changed data are treated  
as preset settings.  
For detailed information on how to change the factory settings, see the  
Maintenance Manual.  
4
Follow the procedure below to reset all settings to the standard setting.  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The page that was on the screen when the last menu operation ended  
appears on the viewfinder screen.  
2
Turn the MENU knob until the USER FILE page appears, and push  
the MENU knob.  
USER FILE page  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-133  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to USER PRESET, and  
push MENU knob.  
4
The message PRESET OK? YES NO appears. In this case, the t  
mark is placed at the left of NO and NO blinks.  
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to YES (YES blinks),  
and push MENU knob.  
Settings for all items in the USER menu are reset to the standard  
settings.  
4-134 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-11 Using the Scene Files  
You can save various detail-adjusted data customized to certain shooting  
scenes as a scene file. Loading the scene file, you can quickly recreate  
setup conditions suitable for the scene.  
You can store up to five scene files in the camcorder memory and up to  
100 scene files in a memory stick.  
Beyond that, you can load data stored in the memory stick into the  
camcorder memory.  
Data that can be stored in the scene file  
You can store the following data in a scene file:  
Adjusted values using the PAINT menu  
4
For detailed information on the PAINT menu, see PAINT Menu List”  
on page A-19.  
Shutter speed settings in the standard mode and ECS mode  
Settings of ND/CC filter knob (when the optional BKDW-701 servo  
filter unit is equipped)  
White balance data to be stored or loaded depends on settings of the  
SCENE WHITE DATA on the REFERENCE page of the FILE menu.  
For details, see Data of the white balance to be stored in the scene fileon page  
4-140.  
4-11-1 Storing Data in the Scene File  
Follow the procedure below to store data as the scene file in the  
camcorder memory or the memory stick.  
To store the data as the scene file in the memory stick, insert the memory  
stick before starting the operation.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-135  
1
Follow the procedure of steps 1 to 3 described in “4-7-9 Confirming  
the Image of the Return Video Signal on the Viewfinder” on page 4-  
93 to display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu.  
The SCENE FILE page appears.  
04 SCENE FILE  
1
2
3
4
5
:
:
:
:
:
4
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID :  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
If you want to set a file ID for the data to be stored, set the file ID  
before going to the step 2.  
For detailed information on setting the file ID, see “Setting the file  
ID” on page 4-143.  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to SCENE STORE, and  
push the MENU knob.  
04 SCENE FILE  
1
2
3
4
5
:
:
:
:
:
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID :  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
,
4-136 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
When no memory stick has been inserted, the SCENE STORE  
window appears.  
When a memory stick has been inserted, the P00 SCENE STORE  
window appears.  
SCENE STORE screen (When no memory stick has been inserted)  
SCENE STORE  
,DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
MEM(1):NEW FILE  
MEM(2):NEW FILE  
MEM(3):NEW FILE  
MEM(4):NEW FILE  
MEM(5):NEW FILE  
4
P00 SCENE STORE screen (When a memory stick has been  
inserted)  
?P00 SCENE STORE  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
MEM(1):NEW FILE  
MEM(2):NEW FILE  
MEM(3):NEW FILE  
MEM(4):NEW FILE  
MEM(5):NEW FILE  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-137  
3
Select the file No.  
When no memory stick has been inserted:  
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the desired file No.,  
and push the MENU knob.  
SCENE STORE  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
MEM(1):NEW FILE  
MEM(2):NEW FILE  
, MEM(3):NEW FILE  
MEM(4):NEW FILE  
MEM(5):NEW FILE  
4
When the storing is completed, the SCENE FILE page appears  
again.  
When you select the file number where the data has been stored:  
The message OVERWRITE OK YES NOappears. In this case,  
the t mark is placed at the left of NO, and NO blinks.  
To stop overwriting, press the MENU knob.  
To overwrite, move the t mark to YES (YES blinks) and push the  
MENU knob.  
When a memory stick has been inserted:  
The ? mark is displayed to the left of P00 at the top left of the  
window. In this case, you can change the page. You can use up to 20  
pages, from P01 to P20, to store scene files in the memory stick.  
Each page can hold up to 5 files.  
4-138 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
1
Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired  
file No appears, and push MENU knob.  
P01 SCENE STORE ESC  
,
,DISPLAY MODE  
:
ALL  
001.SCENE1 00/08/01  
002.NEW FILE  
003.NEW FILE  
004.NEW FILE  
005.NEW FILE  
<
***.5FILE SAVE  
MEM1-5  
4
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the desired file  
No., and push MENU knob.  
P01 SCENE STORE  
MEMORY STICK ACCESS  
ESC  
DISPLAY MODE  
:
ALL  
001.SCENE1  
002.NEW FILE  
003.NEW FILE  
,004.NEW FILE  
005.NEW FILE  
00/08/01  
<
***.5FILE SAVE  
MEM1-5  
The message MEMORY STICK ACCESS appears.  
When the storing is completed, the message COMPLETE!”  
appears, and the BUSY indicator also goes off.  
To cancel the storing and return to the SCENE FILE page:  
Before pushing the MENU knob in step 2, move the t mark  
to ESC at the right top of the window by turning the MENU  
knob and push the MENU knob.  
(Continued)  
The SCENE FILE page appears again.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-139  
When you select the file No. where the data has been saved:  
The message OVERWRITE OK YES NOappears. In this  
case, the t mark is placed at the left of NO, and NO blinks.  
To stop overwriting, press the MENU knob. Repeat step 2.  
To overwrite, move the t mark to YES (YES blinks) and push  
the MENU knob.  
You can select the contents of the user file to be displayed on the  
page.  
4
For details, see Selecting the display contentson page 4-144.  
4
To end menu operations, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
To return to the SCENE FILE page  
After the message COMPLETE!is displayed in step 3, move the  
t mark to ESC at the right top of the window by turning the  
MENU knob and push the MENU knob.  
The SCENE FILE page appears again.  
Data of the white balance to be stored in the scene file  
Data of the white balance to be stored in the scene file depends on the  
setting of SCENE WHITE DATA on the REFERENCE page of the  
FILE menu.  
05 REFERENCE  
REFERENCE STORE : EXEC  
REFERENCE CLEAR : EXEC  
REFERENCE LOAD  
REFERENCE SAVE  
F.ID :  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
,SCENE WHITE DATA:  
INDICATOR <:>  
OFF  
OFF  
:
4-140 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
When SCENE WHITE DATA is set to ON:  
Data of the white balance selected when you store the scene file is  
stored. For example, when the WHITE BAL switch is set to A, the  
adjusted values in memory A are stored in the scene file, when the  
WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST, the preset value is stored.  
When SCENE WHITE DATA is set to OFF:  
Data of the white balance is not stored in the scene file.  
Saving scene files stored in the camcorder memory to  
the memory stick  
You can save five scene files stored in the camcorder to the memory  
4
stick at once.  
Follow the procedure below.  
1
Turn the MENU knob until the desired SCENE STORE page  
appears, and push the MENU knob.  
P01 SCENE STORE ESC  
,
,DISPLAY MODE  
:
ALL  
001.SCENE1  
002.SCENE2  
003.NO FILE  
004.SCENE4  
005.SCENE5  
00/08/01  
00/08/10  
00/09/20  
00/10/03  
<
***.5FILE SAVE  
MEM1-5  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-141  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to 5FILE SAVE T  
MEM 1-5, and push MENU knob.  
P01 SCENE STORE  
MEMORY STICK ACCESS  
ESC  
DISPLAY MODE  
:
ALL  
001.SCENE1  
002.SCENE2  
003.NO FILE  
004.SCENE4  
005.SCENE5  
00/08/01  
00/08/10  
00/09/20  
00/10/03  
<
, ***.5FILE SAVE  
MEM1-5  
4
The message MEMORY STICK ACCESS appears.  
When the storing is completed, the message COMPLETE!!”  
appears and the BUSY indicator goes off.  
To cancel the storing  
Before pushing the MENU knob in step 2, move the t mark to  
ESC at the right top of the window by turning the MENU knob and  
push the MENU knob.  
The SCENE STORE page appears again.  
3
To end menu operations, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
Note  
If files have been stored in the page selected in step 1, those files are  
replaced with files loaded from the camcorder memory. For example,  
files from 1 to 5 are replaced in the page selected in step 1.  
4-142 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
Setting the file ID  
When the file is saved as a scene file, it is useful to set a file to identify  
it.  
When a file is stored in the camcorder memory or in a memory stick, a  
file ID is stored in the memory stick together with the file.  
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to F. ID on the SCENE  
FILE page.  
04 SCENE FILE  
4
1
2
3
4
5
:
:
:
:
:
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
,F.ID :  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
2
Push the MENU knob.  
The F. ID window where you can set the file ID appears.  
F.ID  
ESC  
m
END  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW  
XYZ 0123456789 !#$%&()*+  
,-./:;<=>?@  
RET INS DEL  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-143  
3
4
Follow the procedure of steps 4 and 5 described in 4-7-7 Setting the  
Shot IDon page 4-83 to enter the file ID.  
Note  
Execute the file ID before storing the scene file in the memory stick  
or the camcorder memory. Otherwise, the file ID is not stored with  
the other data.  
When you finish entering the file ID, turn the MENU knob to move  
the t mark to END, then push the MENU knob.  
4
The SCENE FILE page appears.  
04 SCENE FILE  
1
2
3
4
5
:
:
:
:
:
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
,F.ID : AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA  
Perform operations from step 2 in 4-11-1 Storing Data in the Scene  
File on page 4-135.  
This file ID is saved in the memory stick with data.  
Selecting the display contents  
You can select the contents of the file to be displayed on the SCENE  
STORE window and SCENE RECALL window.  
For detailed information on how to select the display contents, see Selecting the  
display contentson page 4-132.  
4-144 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
4-11-2 Loading Scene Files  
Follow the procedure below.  
1
Follow the instructions in steps 1 to 3 described in 4-7-9  
Confirming the Image of the Return Video Signal on the  
Viewfinderon page 4-93 to display the SCENE FILE page of the  
FILE menu.  
The SCENE FILE page appears.  
4
2
Load the scene file.  
To load the scene file stored in the camcorder  
Move the t mark to the desired file No., and push the MENU  
knob.  
The s which is displayed at the left of the file No. changes to x.  
The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene file.  
04 SCENE FILE  
1
2
3
4
5
:AAAAAAAAAAAAA  
:BBBBBBBBBBBBB  
:CCCCCCCCCCCCC  
:DDDDDDDDDDDDD  
:NO FILE  
,
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID :  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
To cancel the selected scene file  
Move the t mark to x, and push the MENU knob. x changes to  
s.  
The camcorder returns to the settings before selecting the scene file.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-145  
You can load the scene file stored in the camcorder on the SCENE  
RECALL window to be displayed in step 1 covered in To load the  
scene file saved in the memory stick.”  
To load the scene file saved in the memory stick  
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to SCENE  
RECALL, and push MENU knob.  
04 SCENE FILE  
4
1
2
3
4
5
:AAAAAAAAAAAAA  
:BBBBBBBBBBBBB  
:CCCCCCCCCCCCC  
:DDDDDDDDDDDDD  
:NO FILE  
STANDARD  
,SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID :  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
The P00 SCENE RECALL window appears. On the P00 page, the  
scene files saved in the camcorder memory are displayed. You can  
also recall the scene file stored in the camcorder memory on this  
page.  
?P00 SCENE RECALL ESC  
DISPLAY MODE  
: F.ID  
MEM(1):AAAAAAAAAAAAA  
MEM(2):BBBBBBBBBBBBB  
MEM(3):CCCCCCCCCCCCC  
MEM(4):DDDDDDDDDDDDD  
MEM(5):NO FILE  
4-146 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
The ? mark is displayed to the left of P00 at the top left of the  
window. In this case, you can change the page.  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired  
file No. appears, and push MENU knob.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to the desired file  
No., and push MENU knob.  
P01 SCENE RECALL ESC  
MEMORY STICK ACCESS  
4
DISPLAY MODE  
:
ALL  
001.SCENE1  
,002.SCENE2  
003.NO FILE  
004.SCENE4  
005.SCENE5  
00/08/01  
00/08/10  
00/09/20  
00/10/03  
,
***.5FILE LOAD  
MEM1-5  
The message MEMORY STICK ACCESS appears.  
When the loading is completed, the message COMPLETE!”  
appears. The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene file.  
If the file No. of the file where no data is stored, NO FILE is  
displayed in the column of that file.  
To cancel the loading  
Before pushing the MENU knob in step 3, move the t mark to  
ESC at the right top of the window by turning the MENU knob and  
push the MENU knob.  
The SCENE FILE page appears again.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-147  
Loading the scene file stored in the memory stick into  
the camcorder memory  
You can load up to five scene files stored in the memory stick into the  
camcorder memory at once.  
1
2
Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE RECALL page which  
contains the desired scene files appears, and push the MENU knob.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to 5FILE LOAD t  
MEM 1-5, and push the MENU knob.  
4
P01 SCENE RECALL ESC  
MEMORY STICK ACCESS  
DISPLAY MODE  
:
ALL  
001.SCENE1  
002.SCENE2  
003.NO FILE  
004.SCENE4  
005.SCENE5  
00/08/01  
00/08/10  
00/09/20  
00/10/03  
,
, ***.5FILE LOAD  
MEM1-5  
The message MEMORY STICK ACCESS appears.  
When loading is complete, the message COMPLETE!appears and  
the BUSY indicator goes off.  
4-148 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
Notes  
The scene files loaded from the memory stick overwrite data  
stored in the camcorder memory.  
To load the scene file stored in the camcorder memory under the  
condition where the memory stick has been inserted, return to the  
P00 SCENE RECALL page and load the desired scene file in the  
camcorder memory from the memory stick.  
When there is a file where no data is stored (NO FILE is  
displayed), a file that has the same file number is not overwritten  
in the camcorder. In the window displayed in step 2, the content of  
the scene file 3 in the camcorder memory is not replaced.  
4
To cancel the loading  
Before pushing the MENU knob in step 2, move the t mark to ESC at  
the right top of the window by turning the MENU knob and push the  
MENU knob.  
The SCENE FILE page appears again.  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 4-149  
4-11-3 Resetting the Settings of the Camcorder to  
the Standard Settings Saved in the  
Reference File  
You can reset the settings of the camcorder to the settings saved in the  
reference file (standard settings).  
For detailed information on the items subject to the reference file, see the  
Maintenance Manual.  
4
On the SCENE FILE page, turn the MENU knob to move the t mark to  
STANDARD, then push the MENU knob.  
04 SCENE FILE  
1
2
3
4
5
:AAAAAAAAAAAAA  
:BBBBBBBBBBBBB  
:CCCCCCCCCCCCC  
:DDDDDDDDDDDDD  
:NO FILE  
,
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID :  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
The s, which is displayed at the left of STANDARD, changes to x.  
When x changes to s, the settings of the camcorder are reset to the  
settings stored in the reference file.  
If you press the MENU knob again while x is lit, operation is canceled,  
and the camcorder returns to the settings before STANDARD was  
selected.  
4-150 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
5-1 Power Supply  
The following power supplies can be used with the camcorder.  
A BP-L60A lithium-ion battery pack  
AC power using AC-550/550CE or AC-DN2B  
5-1-1 Using a BP-L60A Battery Pack  
When a BP-L60A Battery Pack is used, the camcorder will operate  
continuously for about 110 minutes. Before use, charge the battery pack  
with a BC-L120 Battery Charger. It takes about 2.5 hours to charge one  
BP-L60A.  
For more information, refer to the BC-L120 manual.  
Note on using the battery pack  
A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully recharged.  
5
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
5-1  
Attaching the battery pack  
1
Press the battery pack against the back of the camcorder, aligning  
the side line of the battery pack with the line on the camcorder.  
Back of camcorder  
BP-L60A  
Align these lines.  
5
2
Slide the battery pack down until its LOCKarrow points at the  
matching line on the camcorder.  
LOCKarrow  
L
O
C
K
Matching line on  
the camcorder  
5-2  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
Detaching the battery pack  
Holding the button in,  
pull the battery pack up.  
L
O
C
K
5
Detaching the battery pack  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
5-3  
5-1-2 Avoiding Breaks in Operation Due to Dead  
Batteries  
If you use both an internal battery pack and an external battery connected  
to the DC IN connector at the same time, you can avoid breaks in  
operation due to dead batteries.  
When the external battery begins to fail and an internal  
battery pack is also used  
Remove the DC output cable from the DC IN connector. The power  
source will switch to the internal battery pack.  
5
When the external battery begins to fail and an internal  
battery pack is not used  
First load the camcorder with a fully charged internal battery pack, then  
remove the DC output cable of the external battery from the DC IN  
connector. The power source will switch to the internal battery pack. To  
use an external battery again, connect a fully charged external battery to  
the DC IN connector before unloading the internal battery pack. The  
power source will switch to the external battery.  
Continuous operation when operating with only an internal  
battery pack  
First, connect a fully charged external battery to the DC IN connector,  
then change the internal battery.  
Notes  
When an internal battery pack is loaded and an external battery is  
connected to the DC IN connector, the external battery is always used  
as the power source.  
There may be some noise on the video signal at the instant the power  
sources are switched.  
5-4  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
5-1-3 Using an AC Adaptor  
Using the AC-550/550CE AC adaptor  
Connect the camcorder to the AC power supply through the AC-550/  
550CE AC Adaptor as shown in the following figure, and turn the  
POWER switch of the AC-550/550CE on.  
Wall outlet  
Power switch on  
AC-550/550CE  
AC Adaptor  
5
DC OUT  
DC IN  
DC output cable (supplied with the AC-550/550CE)  
Using an AC Adaptor  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
5-5  
Using the AC-DN2B AC adaptor  
Mount the AC-DN2B on the camcorder in the same way as a battery  
pack, then connect to the AC power supply. The AC-DN2B can supply  
up to 150 W of power.  
AC-DN2B  
5
to wall outlet  
Connecting to an AC power source using the AC-DN2B AC Adaptor  
5-1-4 Using the Anton Bauer Ultralight System  
By fitting the camcorder with the Anton Bauer Ultralight system, and  
setting the LIGHT switch to AUTO, you can switch the light on and off  
automatically as you start and stop VTR operation. This system operates  
with lights powered by 12 V, with a maximum power consumption of  
50 W.  
5-6  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
5-2 Adjusting the Viewfinder  
For maximum viewing convenience, you can adjust the viewfinder  
position in the left-right and backward-forward directions.  
5-2-1 Adjusting the Viewfinder Position  
Adjusting the position to the left or right  
3
1
2
5
Adjusting the position to the left or right  
1
2
3
Loosen the viewfinder left-right positioning ring.  
Slide the viewfinder to the most convenient position.  
Tighten the viewfinder left-right positioning ring.  
To store the camcorder in the carrying case  
Always store the camcorder with the viewfinder moved fully in the  
direction opposite to the barrel and the viewfinder left-right positioning  
ring tightened.  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
5-7  
Adjusting the position backward or forward  
1
3
2
5
Adjusting the position backward or forward  
1
2
3
Loosen the viewfinder front-rear positioning lever.  
Slide the viewfinder longitudinally to the most convenient position.  
Tighten the viewfinder front-rear positioning lever.  
5-8  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
5-2-2 Detaching the Viewfinder  
Viewfinder stopper  
3
1
2
5
4
Detaching the viewfinder  
1
2
3
Point the viewfinder barrel up or down.  
Loosen the viewfinder left-right positioning ring.  
Holding the viewfinder stopper up, slide the viewfinder in the  
direction indicated by the arrow and detach it.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
5-9  
4
Remove the viewfinder cable and microphone cable from the clamps  
and disconnect them.  
The viewfinder rotation bracket  
By fitting a BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket (not supplied), you  
can rotate the viewfinder out of the way so that your right leg does not  
hit the viewfinder while you are carrying the camcorder.  
For more information, refer to the BKW-401 manual.  
5
Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket  
5-10 Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
5-3 Mounting the Lens  
Follow the procedure below to mount the lens.  
For information about using the lens, refer to the lens manual.  
Lens mount securing  
rubber  
1 3  
5
5
4
2
Mounting the lens  
1
2
3
Push the lens locking lever up and remove the lens mount cap from  
the lens mount.  
Align the center slot in the lens mount with the center pin on the  
lens, and insert the lens into the mount.  
Holding the lens in place, push the lens locking lever down to mount  
the lens.  
Note  
If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off while the camcorder  
is being used. This could cause a serious accident. Make sure the  
lens is firmly locked. It is recommended that the lens mount  
securing rubber be put on the lens-locking lever as illustrated above.  
4
5
Connect the lens cable to the LENS connector.  
Secure the lens cable with the cable clamps.  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder 5-11  
5-4 Adjusting the Flange  
Focal Length  
If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you zoom from telephoto to  
wide angle, adjust the flange focal length (the distance from the plane of  
the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane). Make this adjustment  
after mounting or changing the lens.  
Adjusting the flange focal length  
The position of the controls for adjusting the flange focal length vary  
somewhat from lens to lens. Check the identification of the various  
controls in the lens manual.  
5
About 3 m (10 ft)  
Adjusting the flange focal length  
1
2
Set the iris to manual.  
Open the iris. Place the flange focal length adjustment chart about 3  
m (10 ft) away from the camera, lit well enough to provide a  
satisfactory video output level.  
3
4
Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or F.B ring (flange focal length  
adjustment ring).  
Use manual or power zoom to set the lens to telephoto.  
5-12 Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
5
Point the camera at the chart by turning the focus ring and focus on  
it.  
6
7
Set the zoom ring to wide angle.  
Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart is in focus, being careful not  
to disturb the focus ring.  
8
9
Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays in focus all the way from  
wide angle to telephoto.  
Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing screws.  
5
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder 5-13  
5-5 Audio Input System  
5-5-1 Using the Supplied Microphone  
The MIC IN connector is the XLR-5-pin (female), so the supplied stereo  
microphone attached to the camcorder can be used.  
Attaching in the supplied microphone in the  
microphone holder  
1
Loosen the screw and open the microphone holder clamp.  
Loosen the screw.  
5
1
Clamp of the  
Microphone holder  
2
Open the clamp  
2
Place the microphone in the microphone holder.  
Place the microphone in the  
holder so that UPis at the top.  
1
Tighten the  
screw.  
3
2
Close the microphone holder.  
5-14 Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
3
Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN connector, then set the  
AUDIO IN switch for the desired recording channel to FRONT.  
Connect to the MIC IN connector.  
5
Recording the stereo sound  
You can record either stereo sound or monaural sound using the supplied  
stereo microphone.  
To record the stereo sound:  
To record the L and R audio signals of the stereo sound in channels 1  
and 2, set both AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 switches to FRONT.  
To record the L and R audio signals of the stereo sound in channels 3  
and 4, set both AUDIO IN CH-3 and CH-4 switches to F.  
Confirm that the front microphone selection function is set to STEREO.  
At the factory, the function of FRONT MIC SELECT is assigned to  
ASSIGN 2 (slide type). Slide the ASSIGN 2 switch to the front (lens  
side). If you have removed the FRONT MIC SELECT function from the  
ASSIGN 2 switch, set FRONT MIC SELECT to STEREO on the  
FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu or OPERATION menu.  
To record the monaural sound:  
Set the appropriate AUDIO IN CH-1, CH-2, CH-3 and/or CH-4  
switch(es) corresponding to the channel(s) to which you want to record  
the monaural sound to FRONT or F.  
Set the front microphone selection function to MONO.  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder 5-15  
5-5-2 Using an External Microphone  
You can connect up to two external monaural microphones using the  
AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 connectors. When using a condenser  
microphone that requires external power (phantom power), set the LINE/  
MIC/+48 V ON switch to +48 V ON.  
If the microphone being used does not require external power (dynamic  
microphone), set the LINE/MIC/+48 V ON switch to MIC.  
Using a detached external microphone  
Set the LINE/MIC/+48 V ON  
switch to +48 V ON if you use  
an external power supply type  
microphone. Otherwise, set  
the switch to MIC.  
5
Monaural  
microphone  
AUDIO IN CH-1  
or CH-2  
AUDIO IN switch: At the factory setting,  
when the audio cable is connected  
to either the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector,  
the signal input to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector is  
automatically selected as the signal to be recorded. This is true  
regardless of the AUDIO IN switch setting. (This is called XLR  
connection automatic detection function.)  
When the XLR connection automatic detection function is set to  
OFF on the VTR MODE 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, set  
the AUDIO IN switch corresponding to the channel to which the  
microphone is connected to REAR.  
Using a detached external microphone  
5-16 Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
Note  
AUDIO CH-1 and CH-2 are female XLR (3-pin) connectors. When the  
microphone cable connector is female, use a converting adaptor.  
Using an external microphone attached to the  
camcorder  
You can attach an external microphone to the camcorder by using the  
CAC-12 Microphone Holder (not supplied). Additionally, by using the  
CRS-3P Cradle Suspension (not supplied), you can reduce the  
mechanical vibration noise from the VTR, and can also attach a long  
microphone. Note, however, that use of the CRS-3P requires a  
microphone holder (A) (Part No. 3-680-581-01), which is not supplied  
with the CRS-3P.  
5
The procedure for attaching an external microphone using a CAC-12 and  
CRS-3P is shown below.  
For more information, refer to the manual supplied with the microphone holder or  
cradle suspension manual.  
1
Assemble the CRS-3P Cradle Suspension and microphone holder  
(A) (Part No. 3-680-581-01).  
Microphone holder (A)  
(Part No. 3-680-581-01)  
CRS-3P Cradle Suspension  
(Continued)  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder 5-17  
2
3
Remove the external microphone holder attachment screws.  
5
Attach the CAC-12 Microphone Holder.  
Screws removed  
in step 2  
CAC-12  
5-18 Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
4
Open the CAC-12 and remove the microphone adaptor.  
Open the CAC-12.  
2
3
Microphone adaptor  
1
Loosen the screw.  
5
5
Mount the assembly from step 1 in the CAC-12.  
Close the CAC-12.  
2
1
3
Tighten the screw.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder 5-19  
6
Mount the microphone into the cradle suspension.  
Microphone  
5
7
Connect the microphone cable to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or AUDIO  
IN CH-2 connector. Set the corresponding AUDIO IN switch to  
REAR.  
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V ON switch to +48V ON or MIC in  
accordance with the type of the microphone power supply.  
If the microphone you connect to AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH2 is of the  
internal batteries type, set the appropriate LINE/MIC/+48V ON  
switch to MIC.  
If the microphone you connect to AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH2 is of the  
external power supply type, set the appropriate LINE/MIC/+48V  
ON switch to +48V ON.  
5-20 Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
5-5-3 Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner (for a UHF  
Wireless Microphone System)  
To use a Sony UHF wireless microphone system, fit one of the following  
UHF portable tuners.  
WRR-855A/855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit  
WRR-810A/860A/862A/862B UHF Portable Tuner  
For each of these UHF portable tuners, use the following attachment  
procedure. (The WRR-860A is taken as an example below.)  
Refer to the UHF portable turner manual for more information.  
Fitting the WRR-855A/855B  
5
You can use the WRR-855A/855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit simply  
by inserting it into the lot in the camcorder, and fastening the fixing  
screws.  
1
Undo the four fixing screws holding the cover of the slot, and  
remove the cover.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder 5-21  
2
Insert the WRR-855A/855B, and fasten the four fixing screws.  
WRR-855A/  
855B  
5
Set the AUDIO IN switch to WIRELESS  
for the channel to be used.  
For the operation of the WRR-855A/855B, refer to the manual supplied with the  
WRR-855A/855B.  
Note  
When the XLR connection automatic detection function is effective,  
even if the AUDIO IN switch is set to WIRELESS, the signal input to  
the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector is automatically selected when  
the audio cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector.  
In such a case, set REAR XLR AUTO to OFF on the VTR MODE 1  
page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
5-22 Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
Fitting the WRR-860A (Using a BP-L60A Battery Pack)  
1
(1) Attach the WRR tuner fitting (not supplied, service part number:  
A-8278-057-A) to the back of the camcorder.  
1
2
3
Pass a screwdriver through the holes and tighten the screws.  
Loosen the adjustment screws.  
Adjust the tuner fitting position for a BP-L60A Battery  
Pack to be attached, and tighten the adjustment screws to  
fix its position.  
4
Attach the BETACAM holder kit supplied with the tuner.  
(2) Attach the battery pack.  
For more information about attaching the BP-L60A Battery Pack, see  
5-1-1 Using a BP-L60A Battery Packon page 5-1.  
5
Back of camcorder  
BP-L60A  
Adjustment screws  
BETACAM  
holder kit  
Holes  
WRR tuner fitting  
(Continued)  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder 5-23  
2
Mount the tuner on the WRR tuner fitting.  
WRR-860A  
5
3
Connect the tuner power cord to the DC OUT connector of the  
camcorder, and the audio output cable to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or  
CH-2 connector.  
Set the LINE/MIC/  
+48 V ON switch  
for the channel to  
which the audio  
out cable is  
attached to MIC.  
AUDIO IN switch: When the XLR  
connection automatic detection function  
is set to OFF on the VTR MODE 1 page of  
the MAINTENANCE menu, set the AUDIO  
IN switch for the channel to which the  
audio output cable is connected to REAR.  
DC OUT  
AUDIO IN for CH-1  
or CH-2  
5-24 Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
5-5-4 Connecting Line Input Audio Equipment  
Connect the audio output connector of the audio equipment that supplies  
the line input signal to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector.  
Set the LINE/MIC/  
+48 V ON switch for the  
channel to which the  
audio signal source is  
connected to LINE.  
5
Audio equipment  
AUDIO IN switch: At the factory setting,  
when the audio cable is connected  
to either the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector,  
AUDIO IN for CH-1  
or CH-2  
the signal input to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2  
connector is automatically selected as the  
signal to be recorded. This is true regardless of  
the AUDIO IN switch setting. (This is called XLR  
connection automatic detection function.)  
When the XLR connection automatic detection  
function is set to OFF on the VTR MODE 1 page  
of the MAINTENANCE menu, set the AUDIO IN  
switch corresponding to the channel to which  
the audio equipment is connected to REAR.  
Line input connection  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder 5-25  
5-6 Tripod Mounting  
You can easily mount and dismount the camcorder on a tripod by using  
the VCT-14 tripod adaptor (not supplied).  
1
Attach the tripod adaptor to the tripod.  
Tripod adaptor  
Camera mount  
5
2
Mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.  
Slide the camcorder forward  
along the groove in the adaptor  
until it clicks.  
5-26 Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
Removing the camcorder from the tripod adaptor  
While pressing  
the red button  
against the  
lever, move the  
lever in the  
direction  
indicated by  
the arrow.  
Red button  
Lever  
5
Removing the camcorder from the tripod adapter  
Note  
The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged position even after the  
camcorder is removed. If this happens, press the red button against the  
lever a second time and move the lever as shown below until the pin  
returns to the stowed position. If the pin remains in the engaged  
position, you will not be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod  
adaptor.  
Stowed position  
Pin  
If the pin remains in the engaged position  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder 5-27  
5-7 Attaching the Shoulder  
Strap  
Attach the supplied shoulder strap as shown below.  
Shoulder strap post  
5
Attaching the shoulder strap  
5-28 Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
Clip  
Attaching  
Pull up the strap to  
lock the fitting.  
Attaching the shoulder strap  
5
Press here and pull in the  
direction shown by the arrow to  
release.  
Removing  
Removing the shoulder strap  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder 5-29  
5-8 Adjusting the Shoulder  
Pad Position  
You can shift the shoulder pad from its center position (factory setting)  
backward by up to 10 mm (3/8 inch) or forward by up to 25 mm (1 inch).  
This adjustment helps you get the best balance for shooting with the  
camcorder on your shoulder.  
1,3  
Bottom  
5
Shoulder pad  
2
Adjusting the shoulder pad position  
1
2
Loosen the two screws.  
Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward until it is in the most  
convenient position.  
3
Tighten the screws.  
5-30 Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
5-9 Putting On the Rain Cover  
Attach the rain cover as illustrated below. You can insert and remove  
cassette tapes, operate various switches and controls, and mount the  
camcorder on the tripod adaptor with the rain cover attached.  
Use this slit when  
attaching a video  
light or other  
Use these slits  
when attaching the  
shoulder strap.  
accessory to the  
light shoe.  
Insert your hand  
here to hold the  
grip.  
5
Rear  
Front  
Velcro tape  
Drawstring  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder 5-31  
Insert the viewfinder barrel here with the  
eyecup out and fasten the drawings  
around the eyecup.  
5
Drawstring  
Velcro tape  
Velcro tape  
5-32 Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
5-10 Connecting the Remote  
Control Unit  
Connecting the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit (not supplied) enables  
remote control of the principal camera functions.  
Connecting the remote control unit to the REMOTE connector (8-pin)  
automatically puts the camcorder into remote control mode. If you  
disconnect the remote control unit, remote control mode is canceled.  
RM-B150  
5
REMOTE  
connector  
Remote control cable  
When connecting the remote control unit to the camcorder  
The following switches on the camcorder will not function:  
GAIN switch  
OUTPUT/DCC switch  
WHITE BAL switch  
AUTO W/B BAL switch  
SHUTTER ON/OFF/SEL switch  
VTR START button switch (VTR button on the lens and the  
ASSIGN 1 switch to which the REC START/STOP function is  
assigned)  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder 5-33  
TURBO GAIN button (ASSIGN 1 switch to which the TURBO  
GAIN function is assigned)  
When you connect the remote control unit, the settings of the paint  
adjustment that were in effect the last time the remote control unit was  
used are recalled.  
When removing the remote control unit from the camcorder  
The setting of the camcorder returns to the setting in effect before the  
remote control unit was connected.  
By setting the menu setting, the setting of the paint adjustment made  
with the remote control unit can be retained even after the remote control  
unit is removed from the camcorder.  
5
For details, see Structure of the paint adjustment dataon the next page.  
When connecting the monitor to the MONITOR OUT  
connector of the remote control unit  
The MONITOR connector of the RM-B150 (BNC type) outputs the  
same signal as that from the TEST OUT connector on the camcorder.  
When the HKDW-702 is installed, you can also connect an NTSC  
monitor.  
When you connect the HD monitor, select the HD-Y signal as the output  
signal from the TEST OUT connector on the OUTPUT SET page of the  
USER menu.  
When connecting an NTSC monitor, select the SD signal (analog  
composite video).  
For details, see 4-8-2 Setting the Output Signalson page 4-100.  
Use the black cable supplied with the RM-B150 to connect the monitor  
to the MONITOR connector on the RM-B150.  
5-34 Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
Structure of the paint adjustment data  
Non-volatile memory  
Independent data  
region  
MASTER  
BLACK  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
KNEE POINT  
DETAIL  
LEVEL  
Setup  
menu of  
the  
Remote control data  
region  
MASTER BLACK  
MASTER GAMMA  
KNEE POINT  
DETAIL LEVEL  
R/B GAIN  
camcorder  
Hardware of  
the camera  
R/B GAIN  
R/B BLACK  
RM-B150  
5
R/B BLACK  
RM-B150  
connected or not  
connected  
As the illustration above shows, non-volatile memory of the camcorder  
consists of two regions: one is the independent data region that becomes  
effective when the remote control unit is not connected, and the other is  
the remote control data region that becomes effective when the remote  
control unit is connected. Paint adjustment data is automatically selected  
depending on whether or not the remote control unit is connected to the  
camcorder.  
Thus, when the remote control unit is connected to the camcorder, the  
effective data region is switched to the remote control data region and  
the settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the last time the  
remote control unit was used are recalled.  
Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder 5-35  
Settings of the absolute value volume controls1) and absolute value  
switches 2) are overwritten by those on the remote control unit after the  
remote control unit is connected.  
When the remote control unit is removed from the camcorder, the  
independent data region becomes effective. Thus the camcorder will  
return to the settings that were in effect before the remote control unit  
was connected.  
When RM COMMON MEMORY is set to ON on the FUNCTION 3  
page of the MAINTENANCE menu, you can use settings of the paint  
adjustment data stored in the independent data region even if you  
connect the remote control unit. In this case, the settings stored in the  
independent data region will be renewed when you change the settings  
on the remote control unit. Thus, the settings of the paint data made with  
the remote control unit can be retained even if the remote control unit is  
removed. However, if the switch position on the remote control unit  
differs from the one on the camcorder, the switch position on the  
camcorder takes precedence over that on the remote control unit.  
Also, it is possible to keep the settings that are in effect before you  
connect the remote control unit. In this case, you should set the volume  
to the relative mode on the remote control unit.  
5
For details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the RM-B150.  
....................................................................................................................................  
1) Absolute value volume control  
The data corresponding to the rotation degree (position) of the volume controls  
is output. The data corresponding to the rotation amount is called the relative  
value volume  
2) Absolute value switch  
Like the toggle switches or slide switches (except the momentary switches), the  
switches (or controls) whose positions must coincide with their functions are  
called absolute value switches.  
5-36 Chapter 5 Setting Up the Camcorder  
6-1 Testing the Camcorder  
Before Shooting  
Check the functions of the camcorder before setting out for a shooting  
session, preferably by operating the camcorder together with a color  
video monitor.  
6-1-1 Preparations for Testing  
3
4
1
6
2
1
2
Attach a fully charged battery pack.  
Set the POWER switch to ON and check that the HUMID indicator  
does not appear and that the BATT indicator shows at least five  
segments.  
If the HUMID indicator appears, wait until it disappears.  
If the BATT indicator does not show at least five segments,  
replace the battery pack with a fully charged one.  
3
4
Check that there are no obstructions near the cassette lid, and then  
press the EJECT button to open the cassette lid.  
After checking the points below, load the cassette and close the  
cassette lid.  
The cassette is not write-protected.  
There is no slack in the tape.  
Condensation does not form in the tape. Chapter 6 Maintenance  
6-1  
Condensation  
If you move the camcorder from a very cold place to a warm place, or  
use it in a damp location, condensation may form on the head drum.  
Then, if the camcorder is operated in this state, the tape may adhere to  
the drum and cause a failure or even permanent damage. Do the  
following to prevent this from happening.  
When moving the camcorder from a cold place to a warm place, be  
sure no cassette is loaded in the camcorder.  
Whenever you turn on the power, check that the HUMID indicator  
does not appear. If it appears, wait until it disappears before loading a  
cassette.  
For more information, see 3-1-1 Loading and Unloading a Cassetteon page 3-1  
and Section 6-3 Operation Warnings(page 6-16).  
6-1-2 Testing the Camera  
Set the switches and selectors as follows.  
6
Iris: Automatic  
Zoom:  
SERVO/MAN  
VTR SAVE/STBY: SAVE  
WHITE BAL: A or B  
GAIN: Set as low as possible.  
OUTPUT/DCC: BARS  
6-2  
Chapter 6 Maintenance  
Testing the viewfinder  
1
2
Adjust the position of the viewfinder.  
Check that the color bars are displayed in the viewfinder, and adjust  
the BRIGHT, CONTRAST, and PEAKING controls to give the best  
color bar display.  
3 Check each of the following operations.  
The menu is displayed on the viewfinder screen.  
Turn the MENU knob and check that the menu page changes to  
the next page.  
Push the MENU knob and check that settings of each item of the  
selected page are displayed.  
Turn the MENU knob and check that the arrow () mark moves  
within the page.  
6
Push the MENU knob and check that the arrow () mark placed  
before the item changes to the circle (z) and the circle (z) placed  
before the setting of the item changes to the question mark (?).  
Turn the MENU knob and check that the setting of the selected  
item or ON/OFF changes.  
4
Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM, and change the ND FILTER  
selector position in the sequence of 1, 2, 3, 4.  
Check that the FILTER indicator on the viewfinder screen displays  
the correct numbers.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 6 Maintenance  
6-3  
5
Check each of the following operations and make sure that the  
indicator lights if the corresponding item has been turned on in the '!'  
LED page of the USER menu.  
Set the gain to anything but 0 dB by using the GAIN selector and  
the GAIN SW page of the OPERATION menu.  
Set the SHUTTER selector to ON.  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.  
Use the lens extender.  
Set the ND FILTER selector to anything but 1".  
Set the reference value of the auto iris to other than the standard  
value.  
6
7
8
Push the SHUTTER selector from ON to SEL repeatedly, and check  
that the shutter setting changes on the viewfinder screen.  
6
Pointing the camera at a suitable subject, focus the camera and  
check the picture on the viewfinder screen.  
Set both of the AUDIO IN switches to FRONT, and check that when  
sound is input to a microphone connected to the MIC IN connector  
on the front of the camcorder, the audio level indicators appear on  
the viewfinder screen.  
9
Check that setting the ZEBRA switch to ON and OFF makes the  
zebra pattern appear and disappear on the viewfinder screen.  
Note  
The current display status may inhibit one or more of the displays or  
operations mentioned in steps 3 to 9. If this happens, set the desired  
items in the VF DISP1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the USER menu.  
For details, see 4-7-2 Selecting the Display Itemson page 4-69.  
6-4  
Chapter 6 Maintenance  
Testing the iris and zoom functions  
1
2
3
Set the zoom to automatic zoom mode and check that the power  
zoom operates correctly.  
Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the zoom functions  
manually.  
Set the iris switch on the lens to AUTO and point the camera at  
objects of different brightness. Check that the automatic iris  
adjustment operates correctly.  
4
5
Set the iris switch on the lens to MANUAL and check that turning  
the iris ring manually adjusts the iris correctly.  
6
Set the iris switch on the lens back to AUTO and check the  
following points when the GAIN selector is moved from L to M to  
H.  
For objects of the same brightness, the iris is adjusted to  
correspond to the change in setting.  
The gain indicator on the viewfinder screen changes to correspond  
to the change in setting.  
6
If an extender mechanism is incorporated in your lens, put the  
extender lever of the lens into the 2x position and check the  
following points.  
EX display appears at the left top on the viewfinder.  
The auto iris functions correctly.  
Chapter 6 Maintenance  
6-5  
6-1-3 Testing the VTR  
Perform tests (1) to (7) consecutively.  
(1) Testing the tape transport functions  
1
2
Set the VTR SAVE/STBY switch to SAVE and check that the VTR  
SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes on.  
Set the VTR SAVE/STBY switch to STBY and check that the VTR  
SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes off.  
3
4
5
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.  
Set the DISPLAY switch to CTL.  
6
Press the VTR START button and check the following points.  
The tape reels are turning.  
The counter indication is changing.  
The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on.  
The RF and SERVO indicators on the display panel are off.  
6
7
Press the VTR START button again and check that the tape stops  
and that the REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off.  
Repeat the checks of steps 5 and 6, this time using the VTR button  
on the lens.  
If the REC BUTTON function is assigned to the ASSIGN 1 switch,  
repeats the checks of steps 5 and 6, this time using the ASSIGN 1  
button.  
8
Press the RESET button and check that the counter display goes to  
00:00:00:00".  
6-6  
Chapter 6 Maintenance  
9
Turn on the LIGHT switch and check that the display panel is  
illuminated.  
10Hold down the REW button to rewind the tape for a while, then  
press the PLAY button. Check that the rewind and playback  
functions operate normally.  
11Press the STOP button and press the F FWD button. Check that the  
fast forward function operates normally.  
(2) Testing the automatic audio level adjusting  
functions  
1
2
3
4
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 switches to FRONT.  
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH-1 and CH-2 switches to AUTO.  
Set the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch to CH-1/2.  
6
Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector at a  
suitable sound source. Check that the level indications for both  
channels 1 and 2 correspond to the sound level.  
5
6
7
Set the AUDIO IN CH-3 and CH-4 switches to F.  
Set the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch to CH-3/4.  
Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector at a  
suitable sound source. Check that the level indications for both  
channels 3 and 4 correspond to the sound level.  
8
Be sure to reset the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch to CH-1/2 after  
checking the channels 3 and 4.  
Chapter 6 Maintenance  
6-7  
(3) Testing the manual audio level adjusting functions  
1
2
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 switches to FRONT.  
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH-1 and CH-2 switches to MANUAL.  
Turn the MIC LEVEL knob. Check that the audio level meter in the  
display panel increases by turning it counterclockwise as seen from  
the front of the camera.  
(4) Testing the earphone and speaker  
1
2
Turn the MONITOR control and check that the speaker volume  
changes accordingly.  
6
Connect an earphone to one EARPHONE jack. Check that the  
speaker sound is cut off and that you can hear the sound from the  
microphone in the earphone.  
3
4
Turn the MONITOR control and check that the earphone volume  
changes accordingly.  
Connect the earphone to the other EARPHONE jack. Check the  
earphone by repeating step 3.  
(5) Testing external microphones  
1
Connect external microphones to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2  
connectors.  
6-8  
Chapter 6 Maintenance  
2
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V ON switch to +48V ON or MIC in  
accordance with the type of the microphone power supply.  
If the microphone you connect to AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH2 is of the  
internal batteries type, set the appropriate LINE/MIC/+48V ON  
switch to MIC.  
If the microphone you connect to AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH2 is of the  
external power supply type, set the appropriate LINE/MIC/+48V  
ON switch to +48V ON.  
3
4
5
Set the AUDIO IN switches to REAR.  
Aim the microphones at a sound source.  
Check that the audio level meter in the display panel and the audio  
level indicators in the viewfinder reflect the changing sound level.  
6
(6) Checking the XLR connection automatic detection  
function  
Before starting to check, remove the microphone connected to the MIC  
IN connector if it is connected.  
1
2
Perform operations of steps 1 and 2 explained in (5) Testing  
external microphones.  
Set the AUDIO IN switches to FRONT.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 6 Maintenance  
6-9  
3
Perform operations of steps 4 and 5 explained in (5) Testing  
external microphones.  
When performing the operation of step 5 in (5) Testing external  
microphones, if the audio level meters in the display panel and  
audio level indicators in the viewfinder reflect the changing sound  
level, the function of the XLR connection automatic detection works  
correctly.  
If it does not reflect the changing sound level, the function of the  
XLR connection automatic detection is set to OFF. Set REAR XLR  
AUTO to ON on the VTR MODE 1 page of the MAINTENANCE  
menu.  
If it does not reflect even after you set REAR XLR AUTO to ON,  
the XLR connection automatic detection function does not work  
correctly.  
6
(7) Checking the functions of the user bits and time  
code  
1
2
Set the user bits as required.  
For more information see 4-5-3 Setting the User Bitson page 4-37.  
Set the time code.  
For more information, see 4-5-1 Setting the Time Codeon page 4-34.  
3
4
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.  
Press the VTR START button, and check that the tape starts and  
that the counter indication changes.  
5
Press the VTR START button again, and check that the tape stops  
and that the counter indication also stops changing.  
6-10 Chapter 6 Maintenance  
6
7
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN, and check that the  
counter indication changes regardless of whether the tape is running.  
Set the DISPLAY switch to DATA and the DATA DISPLAY switch  
to U-BIT, and check that the user bit value that was set is displayed.  
6
Chapter 6 Maintenance 6-11  
6-2 Maintenance  
6-2-1 Cleaning the Video Heads  
To clean the video heads, use a Sony BCT-HD12CL Cleaning Cassette.  
Follow the instructions given with the cleaning cassette, as incorrect or  
excessive use could damage the video heads.  
To clean the heads, follow the procedure below.  
1
2
3
Load the cleaning cassette according to the procedure described in  
Loading a cassette(page 3-1).  
After the cleaning cassette is inserted, the tape runs automatically in  
PLAY mode for about 3 seconds to clean the head.  
After the tape runs, the cleaning cassette is automatically ejected.  
6
Note  
Do not run the cleaning cassette 5 or more times consecutively.  
6-2-2 Cleaning the Viewfinder  
Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and mirror inside the barrel.  
Clean the lens and protecting filter with a commercially available lens  
cleaner.  
Caution  
Never use organic solvents such as thinners.  
6-12 Chapter 6 Maintenance  
Disassembling the eyepiece for cleaning  
1
4
2
Packing  
ring  
Viewfinder  
barrel  
Eyecup  
holder  
Protecting  
filter  
Eyecup  
6
3
1
Detach the eyepiece from the viewfinder barrel.  
For the detaching procedure, see the following Detaching the eyepieceon  
the next page.  
2
3
Remove the eyecup from the eyecup holder.  
Remove the protecting filter, together with the packing rig, from  
inside the eyecup folder.  
4
Detach the protecting filter from the packing ring.  
Chapter 6 Maintenance 6-13  
Detaching the eyepiece  
1
Turn the eyepiece locking ring fully counterclockwise to line up the  
red match mark on the locking ring with the red match mark on the  
viewfinder barrel.  
Locking ring  
6
Locking ring match mark  
Match mark on the viewfinder barrel  
2
Detach the eyepiece.  
Match mark on end of eyepiece  
6-14 Chapter 6 Maintenance  
Refitting the eyepiece  
1
2
Align the match mark on the eyepiece locking ring with that on the  
viewfinder barrel.  
Align the match mark on the end of the eyepiece (see step 2 in  
Detaching the eyepieceon the previous page) with that of the  
eyepiece locking ring, then insert the eyepiece into the viewfinder  
barrel.  
3
Turn the eyepiece locking ring clockwise until its LOCK”  
indication arrow points to the match mark on the viewfinder barrel.  
Fog-proof filter  
Depending on the temperature and humidity, the protecting filter may  
mist because of vapor or your breath. To ensure that the viewfinder is  
always clear, replace the protecting filter with a fog-proof filter (Part No.  
1-547-341-11, not supplied).  
6
Fitting the fog-proof filter  
Replace the protecting filter on the packing ring with the fog-proof filter.  
Be sure to correctly assemble the fog-proof filter, the packing ring, and  
the eyecup so that the reassembled eyepiece is waterproof.  
Note  
When cleaning the fog-proof filter, wipe it very gently with a soft cloth  
to avoid impairing the anti-fogging coating.  
Chapter 6 Maintenance 6-15  
6-3 Operation Warnings  
When a problem occurs either at power on or during operation, warnings  
are given by the WARNING indicator and TALLY indicator, in the  
Operation warnings  
Display panel  
Indicators in the viewfinder  
Warning sounds  
:
Warning/  
Flashing/  
:Continuous  
:1 flash/s  
:2 flashes/s  
:4 flashes/s 4 beeps/s  
Battery  
status  
continuous  
WARNING REC/tally BATT  
:1 beep/s  
indication  
:
Continuous beep  
a)  
RF  
Continuousa)  
Continuous  
SERVO  
6
a)  
HUMID  
SLACK  
Continuous  
Continuous  
b)  
a)  
TAPEc)  
Flashinga)  
TAPE and E Flashing  
d)  
BATT Flashing  
BATT and E Flashing  
a) During recording  
b) During playback, fast forward, or rewind  
c) Also, 5-0appears for the tape remaining indication.  
d) During recording or stop mode  
6-16 Chapter 6 Maintenance  
display panel, and in the viewfinder. The speaker and earphone also give  
audible warnings.  
Problem  
VTR action  
Corrective action  
Video head gap  
After clogged head is detected, recording Clean the heads. If recording is still  
clogged or problem continues but is substandard.  
in recording circuit.  
substandard, turn off the power and consult  
your Sony representative.  
Servo lock lost.  
Recording continues but is substandard. Turn off the power and consult your Sony  
representative. Note that this indication may  
be given momentarily when the tape starts  
moving, but this does not indicate a problem.  
6
Condensation on the Recording continues but stops if the tape Stop the tape and wait until the HUMID  
head drum.  
sticks to the head drum. Playback, fast  
forward, and rewind do not operate.  
indicator disappears.  
The tape cannot be  
wound properly.  
Remove the cassette by the method  
described in the Maintenance Manual.  
Close the cassette lid without loading a  
cassette, turn off the power, and consult  
your Sony representative.  
VTR stops. An error code appears in the  
time code display section of the display  
panel. Look up the error code in the  
Maintenance Manual.  
Operation continues.  
Near the end of tape.  
End of tape.  
Be prepared to change the cassette.  
Record, playback, and fast forward do not  
operate.  
Change the cassette or rewind the tape.  
Operation continues. e)  
Operation stops.  
Low battery.  
Change the battery.  
Change the battery.  
Dead battery.  
e) During auto interval recording mode, once the VTR stops.  
Chapter 6 Maintenance 6-17  
Notes on CCD image sensors  
Vertical smear  
Smear tends to be produced when an extremely bright object is being  
shot; it is more likely to occur with a faster electronic shutter speed.  
Vertical tails show on the image.  
Bright object  
(mercury lamp, the sun, reflections, etc.)  
Monitor screen  
Vertical smear  
6
Aliasing  
When patterns of stripes or lines are shot, they may appear jagged.  
6-18 Chapter 6 Maintenance  
Specifications  
Power voltage  
12 +15..00 V DC  
Power consumption  
34 W (with 12 V DC supply, when recording)  
Operating temperature  
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Operating humidity  
25% to 85% (relative humidity)  
Storage temperature  
-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)  
Mass  
Approx. 5.4 kg (11 lb 14 oz) (with viewfinder, cassette, and BP-L60A  
Battery Pack)  
A
Dimensions  
37  
308  
345  
Dimensions in mm  
Appendix  
A-1  
Video Camera Section  
General  
Imager  
2/3-type CCD with 2,000,000 pixels  
Effective picture elements  
1920 (H) x 1080 (V)  
Imager Configuration  
RGB 3 CCDs  
Spectral system  
F1.4 prism system (with quartz filter)  
Built-in filters  
CC filter  
A: Cross filter  
B: 3200K  
C: 4300K  
D: 6300K  
ND filter  
A
1: Clear  
2: 1/4 ND  
3: 1/16 ND  
4: 1/64 ND  
Lens mount  
Special bayonet type  
Sensitivity  
89.9% reflection chart, 2000 lx (F10 standard)  
A-2 Appendix  
VTR Section  
General  
Usable cassette tapes  
BCT-22HD/40HD 1/2-inch HDCAM cassette tapes  
Tape speed  
Approx. 96.7 mm/s (at 30 frames) (for 59.94I format)  
Approx. 80.6 mm/s (at 25 frames) (for 50I format)  
Record/playback time  
40 minutes (using BCT-40HD video cassette) (for 59.94I format)  
48 minutes (using BCT-40HD video cassette) (for 50I format)  
Fast forward time  
Approx. 5 minutes (using BCT-40HD video cassette)  
Rewind time  
Approx. 5 minutes (using BCT-40HD video cassette)  
A
Continuous recording time  
Approx. 110 minutes (using BP-L60A Battery Pack)  
Appendix  
A-3  
Digital video  
Digital video signal  
Sampling frequency  
Y
74.25 MHz  
PB/PR  
37.125 MHz  
Quantization  
10 bits/sample  
(8 bits/sample for compression processing)  
Compression  
Coefficient recording system  
S-NRZI PR-IV  
Channel coding  
Error correction  
Error concealment  
Reed-Solomon code  
Adaptive three dimensional  
Audio (with standard playback machine)  
+0.5  
Frequency response  
20 Hz to 20 kHz  
dB  
1.0  
Dynamic range  
Distortion  
85 dB min. (emphasis ON)  
0.08% max.  
A
Cross talk  
70 dB max.  
Wow and flutter  
Below measurable limit  
Input/output connectors  
Signal inputs  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 (XLR, 3-pin, female)  
60 dBu/+4 dBu  
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms.)  
MIC IN (XLR, 5-pin, female)  
60 dBu  
A-4 Appendix  
GENLOCK IN (BNC type)  
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω  
TC IN (BNC type)  
0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 k Ω  
Signal outputs  
TEST OUT (BNC type)  
1.0 Vp-p, 75 , unbalanced  
VBS/SDI OUT (BNC type) (only when the HKDW-702 is installed)  
75 , unbalanced  
VBS OUT: 1.0 Vp-p  
SDI OUT: 0.8 Vp-p  
HD SDI OUT (BNC type)  
0.8 Vp-p, 75 , unbalanced  
A
AUDIO OUT (XLR, 5-pin, male)  
0 dBm  
TC OUT (BNC type)  
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω  
EARPHONE (minijack)  
8 , to -18 dBs variable  
Appendix  
A-5  
Others  
DC IN (XLR, 4-pin, male)  
11 to 17 V DC  
DC OUT (4-pin)  
11 to 17 V DC, maximum current 0.1 A  
LENS (12-pin)  
REMOTE (8-pin)  
Supplied Accessories  
HD Electronic Viewfinder (HDVF-20A) (1)  
Stereo microphone (super cardioid directional, external power supply  
type) (1)  
Shoulder Strap (1)  
Lens mount securing rubber (1)  
Operation Manual (1)  
A
Recommended Additional Equipment  
Power supply and related equipment  
BP-L60A Battery Pack  
BC-L120 Battery Charger (for BP-L60A Battery Pack)  
AC-550/550CE AC Adaptor  
AC-DN2B AC Adaptor  
HDCAM cassette tapes  
BCT-22HD/40HD  
Memory label  
MLB-1M-100  
A-6 Appendix  
Camera adaptor  
HDCA-901  
Viewfinder and related equipment  
BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket  
Fog-proof filter (Part No. 1-547-341-11)  
Lens assembly (farsighted) (Part No. A-8262-537-A)  
Lens assembly (low magnification) (Part No. A-8262-538-A)  
Lens assembly (standard magnification with special compensation for  
aberrations) (Part No. A-8267-737-A)  
Optical attachments  
ND filter (1/8 ND) (Part No. 3-174-685-01)  
ND filter (1/32 ND) (Part No. 3-174-683-01)  
Cross filter (Part No. 3-174-682-01)  
Mount ring (Part No. 3-186-442-01)  
Consult your Sony representative for more information about these filters.  
Equipment for remote control  
RM-B150 Remote Control Unit  
A
Audio equipment  
C-74 microphone  
ECM-MS5 stereo microphone  
CAC-12 Microphone Holder  
CCXA-53 Audio Cable  
CRS-3P Cradle Suspension  
WRR-855A/855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit  
WRR-810A/860A/862A/862B UHF Portable Tuner  
WRT-27 UHF Transmitter  
BTA-27 UHF Portable Tuner Attachment Kit  
For Audio equipment described above, confirm whether the connector is male or  
female and the number of pins on the connector.  
The audio input connectors of the camcorder are female and 3-pin and the audio  
output connectors are male and 5-pin. A converting adaptor may be required  
depending on the audio equipment to be connected to the camcorder.  
Appendix  
A-7  
Extension boards  
HKDW-702 DOWN CONVERTER BOARD  
HKDW-703 PICTURE CACHE BOARD  
Equipment for maintenance and easier handling  
BCT-HD12CL Cleaning Cassette  
Hard Carrying Case  
LC--DS200SFT Soft Carrying Case  
Tripod Adaptor VCT-14  
Rain cover  
WRR Tuner Fitting (service part number: A-8278-057-A)  
Maintenance Manual  
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
A
A-8 Appendix  
Menu List  
This section briefly explains menus that the camcorder provides for  
adjustments and settings using tables.  
For the menu configuration, see 4-6-1 Menu Configuration(4-46). Chapter 4  
elaborates on adjustments and settings to be made using the USER menu.  
This manual also explains some of adjustments and settings to be made  
using the OPERATION menu, PAINT menu, MAINTENANCE menu,  
FILE menu and DIAGNOSIS menu.  
For detailed information on these menus, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
OPERATION Menu List  
Some pages of the OPERATION menu have been registered in the  
USER menu at the factory. The MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you  
to edit the USER menu to suit your requirements.  
This section describes the list of the OPERATION menu pages first  
registered in the USER menu. For detailed information on functions, see  
the reference pages given in the table.  
The section then describes the list of the pages on the OPERATION  
menu excluding those registered in the USER menu.  
A
Appendix  
A-9  
Page  
Setting items  
Reference page  
OUTPUT SEL  
HD SDI OUT  
4-100  
REAR BNC OUT SEL  
TEST OUT SELECT  
DOWN CON MODE  
ASSIGN SW <1>  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
FRONT MIC SELECT  
DF/NDF a)  
FUNCTION 1  
3-21, 3-27, 3-44, 4-36,  
4-108, 5-15  
END SEARCH  
LOOP/INTVAL REC  
LOOP REC TIME  
TAKE TOTAL TIME  
REC TIME  
PRE-LIGHTING  
NUMBER OF FRAME  
VF DISP  
A
VF DISP 1  
4-70  
VF DISPLAY MODE  
DISP EXTENDER  
DISP FILTER  
DISP WHITE  
DISP GAIN  
DISP SHUTTER  
DISP AUDIO  
DISP TAPE  
DISP IRIS  
a) Only for the 59.94I format model  
A-10 Appendix  
Page  
Setting items  
Reference page  
VF DISP 2  
DISP ZOOM  
4-71  
DISP COLOR TEMP.  
DISP VOLT  
DISP WRR RF LVL  
DISP TIME CODE  
!LED  
GAIN  
<!>  
<!>  
<!>  
<!>  
<!>  
<!>  
<!>  
2-46  
SHUTTER  
WHT PRESET  
ATW RUN  
EXTENDER  
FILTER  
OVERRIDE  
MARKER  
MARKER 1  
4-74  
CENTER  
A
CENTER MARK  
SAFETY ZONE  
SAFETY AREA  
ASPECT  
ASPECT SELECT  
ASPECT MASK  
ASPECT MASK LVL  
100% MARKER  
GAIN LOW  
GAIN SW  
4-97  
GAIN MID  
GAIN HIGH  
GAIN TURBO  
TURBO SW IND.  
Appendix A-11  
Page  
Setting items  
ZEBRA  
Reference page  
VF SETTING  
4-77  
ZEBRA SELECT  
ZEBRA1 DET.LEVEL  
ZEBRA2 DET.LEVEL  
ASPECT  
VF DETAIL LEVEL  
VF DTL H LEVEL  
VF DTL V LEVEL  
IRIS OVERRIDE  
IRIS SPEED  
AUTO IRIS  
4-20  
CLIP HIGH LIGHT  
IRIS WINDOW  
IRIS WINDOW IND.  
IRIS VAR WIDTH  
IRIS VAR HEIGHT  
IRIS VAR H POS  
IRIS VAR V POS  
ID-1  
A
SHOT ID  
4-83  
4-80  
ID-2  
ID-3  
ID-4  
SHOT DISP  
SHOT DATE  
SHOT TIME  
SHOT MODEL NAME  
SHOT SERIAL NO  
SHOT ID SEL  
A-12 Appendix  
Page  
Setting items  
STATUS ABNORMAL  
STATUS FUNTION  
STATUS AUDIO  
USER FILE SAVE  
USER FILE LOAD  
F.ID  
Reference page  
SET STATUS  
4-89  
USER FILE  
LENS FILE  
4-122, 4-126, 4-130,  
4-133  
USER PRESET  
LENS FILE SELECT  
F.ID  
4-116  
F STOP  
A
Appendix A-13  
The following is the list of the pages of the OPERATION menu that are  
not included in the USER menu at the factory.  
Note  
When the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis ( ) in the setting  
column, the setup value is the relative value. The range of setting in  
parenthesis ( ) can be different from what shown in the manual  
depending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu.  
Page  
FUNCTION 2 WHITE  
SWITCH <B>  
Items  
Setting  
Contents  
MEM/ATW  
Sets the function of the  
WHITE BAL B switch  
SHOCKLESS  
WHITE  
OFF/1/2/3  
OFF/ON  
Changes the white gain  
smoothly when operating  
the WHITE BAL switch  
LOW LIGHT  
Turns the warning display  
on or off when the video  
average level is less than  
the preset value.  
A
LOW LIGHT  
LEVEL  
(99 to 99)  
Sets the level at which  
the LOW LEVEL function  
becomes effective.  
BATTERY  
WARNING  
10%/20%  
Selects the remaining  
amount of the alarm  
voltage when the Anton  
battery is connected.  
A-14 Appendix  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
Contents  
Turns the box cursor on  
or off.  
MARKER 2  
USER BOX  
OFF/ON  
Width (from the center  
to right or left side.  
USER BOX  
WIDTH  
1 to 479  
Height (from the center  
to top or bottom.  
USER BOX  
HEIGHT  
1 to 269  
H position of the center  
USER BOX  
H POS.  
(480 to 479)  
(270 to 269)  
(480 to 479)  
(270 to 269)  
V position of the center  
USER BOX  
V POS.  
H position of the center  
marker  
CENTER  
H POS.  
V position of the center  
marker  
CENTER V  
POS.  
A
Appendix A-15  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
Contents  
Selects whether or not  
the marker signal is  
mixed to the output  
signal from the TEST  
OUT connector.  
TEST OUT  
TEST OUT  
MARKER  
OFF/ON  
Selects whether or not  
the VF DISP display  
signal is mixed to the  
output signal from the  
TEST OUT connector.  
TEST OUT  
VF DISP  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
Selects whether or not  
the MENU display signal  
is mixed to the output  
signal from the TEST  
OUT connector.  
TEST OUT  
MENU  
Selects whether or not  
the ZEBRA display  
TEST OUT  
ZEBRA  
signal is mixed to the  
output signal from the  
TEST OUT connector.  
A
OUTPUT  
SELECT  
Y/R/G/B  
Select the output signal  
from the TEST OUT  
connector.  
A-16 Appendix  
Page  
OFFSET WHT OFFSET  
WHITE <A>  
Items  
Setting  
Contents  
ON: Adds the offset  
adjusted on this page to  
the white balance of  
channel A.  
OFF/ON  
Sets the offset for the  
white balance of channel  
A, using the color  
WARM  
COOL <A>  
Color  
temperature  
display  
temperature. Adjust the  
value while looking at the  
real image because error  
tends to be greater for  
adjustment of high color  
temperature.  
Adjusts the value more  
precisely if the  
COLOR  
FINE <A>  
(99 to 99)  
adjustment by WARM-  
COOL <A> is not  
satisfactory.  
A
ON: Adds the offset  
adjusted on this page to  
the white balance of the  
channel B.  
OFFSET  
OFF/ON  
WHITE <B>  
Sets the offset for the  
white balance of channel  
B, using the color  
WARM  
COOL <B>  
Color  
temperature  
display  
temperature. Adjust the  
value while looking at the  
real image because error  
tends to be greater for  
adjustment of high color  
temperature.  
Adjusts the value more  
precisely if the  
adjustment by WARM-  
COOL <B> is not  
satisfactory.  
COLOR  
FINE <B>  
(99 to 99)  
Appendix A-17  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
Contents  
SHT ENABLE SHUTTER  
ECS  
OFF/ON  
Sets the ECS mode to  
ON or OFF.  
Sets 1/100 (1/60) a)  
shutter mode to ON or  
OFF.  
SHUTTER  
1/100 (1/60)a)  
OFF/ON  
SHUTTER  
1/125  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
Sets 1/125 shutter mode  
to ON or OFF.  
SHUTTER  
1/250  
Sets 1/250 shutter mode  
to ON or OFF.  
SHUTTER  
1/500  
Sets 1/500 shutter mode  
to ON or OFF.  
SHUTTER  
1/1000  
Sets 1/1000 shutter  
mode to ON or OFF.  
SHUTTER  
1/2000  
Sets 1/2000 shutter  
mode to ON or OFF.  
A
a) 1/100 for the 59.94I format model  
1/60 for the 50I format model  
A-18 Appendix  
PAINT Menu List  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
Contents  
SW STATUS GAMMA  
OFF/ON  
Turns the gamma  
correction on or off.  
BLACK GAMMA OFF/ON  
Turns the black gamma  
correction on or off.  
MATRIX  
KNEE  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
ON/OFF  
OFF/ON  
Turns the linear matrix  
correction on or off.  
Turns the knee  
correction on or off.  
WHITE CLIP  
DETAIL  
Turns the white clipping  
correction on or off.  
Turns the detail signal on  
or off.  
APERTURE  
FLARE  
Turns the aperture  
function on or off.  
A
Turns the flare function  
on or off.  
EVS  
Turns the EVS shutter  
on or off.  
TEST SAW  
OFF/  
Selects the test signal.  
ANALOG/  
DIGITAL  
Appendix A-19  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
Contents  
WHITE  
COLOR  
TEMP <A>  
Color  
temperature  
display  
Sets the temperature of  
WHITE A.  
COLOR  
FINE <A>  
(99 to 99)  
Adjusts the value more  
precisely when the color  
temperature adjustment  
through COLOR TEMP is not  
satisfactory.  
R GAIN <A>  
B GAIN <A>  
(99 to 99)  
Only the value of R GAIN is  
changed.  
(99 to 99)  
Only the value of B GAIN is  
changed.  
COLOR  
TEMP <B>  
Color  
temperature  
display  
Sets the temperature of  
WHITE B  
COLOR  
FINE <B>  
Adjusts the value more  
precisely when the color  
temperature adjustment  
through COLOR TEMP is not  
satisfactory.  
(99 to 99)  
A
R GAIN <B>  
B GAIN <B>  
(99 to 99)  
Only the value of R GAIN is  
changed.  
(99 to 99)  
Only the value of B GAIN is  
changed.  
A-20 Appendix  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
Contents  
BLACK  
MASTER  
BLACK  
(99 to 99)  
Adjusts the master black  
level.  
R BLACK  
B BLACK  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
Adjusts the R black level.  
Adjusts the B black level.  
MASTER  
FLARE  
Adjusts the flare level of the  
master.  
R FLARE  
G FLARE  
B FLARE  
FLARE  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
OFF/ON  
Adjusts the R flare level.  
Adjusts the G flare level.  
Adjusts the B flare level.  
Turns the flare correction  
circuit on or off.  
OUTPUT  
SELECT  
Y/R/G/B  
Selects the output signal of  
HD SDI, VBS/SDI OUT and  
TEST OUT.  
A
Appendix A-21  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
Contents  
Turns the gamma correction  
function on or off.  
GAMMA  
GAMMA  
OFF/ON  
Sets the master gamma  
correction curve.  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
Y/R/G/B  
Sets the R gamma correction  
curve.  
R GAMMA  
G GAMMA  
B GAMMA  
Sets the G gamma correction  
curve.  
Sets the B gamma correction  
curve.  
Selects the output signal of  
HD SDI, VBS/SDI OUT and  
TEST OUT.  
OUTPUT  
SELECT  
Selects the gamma table.  
GAMMA SEL  
(STD)  
1/2/3/4/  
A
A-22 Appendix  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
Contents  
BLK  
GAMMA  
BLACK  
GAMMA  
OFF/ON  
Turns the black gamma  
correction on or off.  
BLK GAMMA  
RANGE  
LOW/L.MID/  
H.MID/HIGH  
Sets the range affected by  
black gamma.  
MASTER  
BLK GAMMA  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
Y/R/G/B  
Adjusts the master black  
gamma.  
R BLK  
GAMMA  
Sets the correction curve of  
the R black gamma.  
G BLK  
GAMMA  
Sets the correction curve of  
the G black gamma.  
B BLK  
GAMMA  
Sets the correction curve of  
the B black gamma.  
OUTPUT  
SELECT  
Selects the output signal of  
HD SDI, VBS/SDI OUT and  
TEST OUT.  
A
Page  
Items  
Settings  
Contents  
KNEE  
KNEE  
OFF/ON  
Turns the knee correction  
circuit on or off.  
KNEE POINT  
50 to 109  
Sets the knee point level.  
Set the knee slope level.  
KNEE SLOPE (99 to 99)  
KNEE  
SATURATION  
OFF/ON  
(99 to 99)  
OFF/ON  
Turns the knee saturation  
function on or off.  
KNEE SAT  
LEVEL  
Sets the knee saturation  
level.  
WHITE CLIP  
Turns the white clipping  
function on or off.  
WHITE  
CLIP LEVEL  
100.0  
to 109.5  
Adjusts the white clipping  
level.  
Appendix A-23  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
Contents  
DETAIL1 DETAIL  
OFF/ON  
Sets the detail correction  
function on or off.  
APERTURE  
OFF/ON  
Turns the aperture correction  
function on or off.  
DETAIL LEVEL (99 to 99) Sets the general level of the  
detail signal.  
APERTURE  
LEVEL  
(0 to 15)  
Sets the aperture level.  
DETAIL H/V  
RATIO  
(99 to 99) Sets the level of the V detail  
signal.  
CRISPENING (99 to 99) Sets the crispening level.  
LEVEL  
DEPEND  
OFF/ON  
Turns the level depend  
function on or off.  
LEVEL  
(99 to 99) Sets the level of level  
DEPEND LVL  
depend.  
DETAIL FREQ (99 to 99) Sets the frequency of the H  
A
detail signal.  
Page  
DETAIL 2 KNEE  
APERTURE  
Items  
Setting  
Contents  
OFF/ON  
Turns the knee aperture  
function on or off.  
KNEE  
APT LEVEL  
(0 to 199)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
Sets the knee aperture level.  
Sets the detail white limiter.  
Sets the detail black limiter.  
Sets the V detail black limiter.  
DETAIL  
WHT LIMIT  
DETAIL  
BLK LIMIT  
DETAIL  
V-BLK LMT  
A-24 Appendix  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
Contents  
SD  
DETAIL  
SD DETAIL  
OFF/ON  
Turns the detail function on  
or off.  
SD DETAIL  
LEVEL  
(–99 to 99)  
(0 to15)  
Turns the general level of the  
detail signal.  
SD  
Sets the crispening level.  
Sets the detail white limiter.  
Sets the detail black limiter.  
CRISPENING  
SD DTL  
WHT LIMIT  
(–99 to 99)  
(–99 to 99)  
OFF/ON  
(0 to 15)  
(0 to 3)  
SD DTL  
BLK LIMIT  
SD LEVEL  
DEPEND  
Turns the level depend  
function on or off.  
SD LV  
DEPEND LVL  
Sets the level depend level.  
SD DTL  
FREQ.  
Sets the frequency of the H  
detail signal.  
A
SD DTL  
H/V RATIO  
(0 to 7)  
Sets the V detail.  
Sets the cross color  
suppression level.  
SD CROSS  
COLOR a)  
(0 to 15)  
a) Only for the 59.94I format model  
Appendix A-25  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
Contents  
SKIN  
DETAIL  
SKIN  
DETAIL ALL  
OFF/ON  
Turns on all of 1, 2 and 3 of  
the skin detail setting.  
SKIN  
DETECT  
Executes auto hue detection  
function.  
SKIN  
AREA IND  
OFF/ON  
1/2/3  
Turns the zebra indication on  
or off in the area of the  
currently selected type of the  
skin detail setting.  
SKIN  
DTL SELECT  
Selects one of three skin  
detail settings, which you  
want to set. The settings of  
the following items belong to  
the setting number selected in  
this item.  
SKIN  
DETAIL  
OFF/ON  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
0 to 359  
Turns the skin detail function  
on or off.  
SKIN  
DETAIL LVL  
Sets the level of the skin  
detail signal.  
A
SKIN  
DTL SAT.  
Adjusts the saturation level of  
the hue.  
SKIN  
DTL HUE  
Adjusts the center phase of  
the hue.  
SKIN  
0 to 359  
Adjusts the width of the hue.  
DTL WIDTH  
A-26 Appendix  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
Contents  
Turns the linear matrix  
MTX  
MATRIX  
OFF/ON  
correction and user-set matrix  
correction functions on or off.  
LINEAR  
Turns the user-set matrix  
correction function on or off.  
MATRIX  
(USER)  
OFF/ON  
Turns the preset matrix on or  
off.  
MATRIX  
(PRESET)  
OFF/ON  
Select the preset matrix.  
MATRIX  
(PRST) SEL  
1/2/3/4/5/6  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
Sets the arbitrary R-G user-  
set matrix coefficients.  
MATRIX  
(USER) R-G  
Sets the arbitrary R-B user-  
set matrix coefficients.  
MATRIX  
(USER) R-B  
Sets the arbitrary G-R user-  
set matrix coefficients.  
MATRIX  
(USER) G-R  
Sets the arbitrary G-B user-  
set matrix coefficients.  
MATRIX  
(USER) G-B  
A
Sets the arbitrary B-R user-  
set matrix coefficients.  
MATRIX  
(USER) B-R  
Sets the arbitrary B-G user-  
set matrix coefficients.  
MATRIX  
(USER) B-G  
Appendix A-27  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
Contents  
MTX  
MATRIX  
OFF/ON  
Turns the linear matrix  
MULTI  
correction and multi matrix  
correction functions on or off.  
MATRIX  
(MULTI)  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
Turns the multi matrix  
correction function on or off.  
MATRIX  
AREA IND  
Turns the zebra indication on  
or off in the area  
corresponding to the  
currently selected setting.  
MATRIX  
COLOR DET  
Executes the automatic color  
detection function.  
MTX  
(MULTI)AXIS  
B/B+/MG-/  
MG/MG+/R/  
R+/YL-/YL/  
YL+/G-/G/  
G+/CY/  
Sets the region in which the  
multi matrix correction  
function can be changed.  
(sixteen-axis mode)  
CY+/B-  
A
MTX (MULTI)  
HUE  
(99 to 99)  
Adjusts the color phase  
affected by the multi matrix  
correction function in every  
sixteen-axis mode.  
MTX (MULTI)  
SAT  
(99 to 99)  
Adjusts the saturation level  
affected by the multi matrix  
correction function in every  
sixteen-axis mode.  
A-28 Appendix  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
Contents  
Turns the V modulation  
function on or off.  
V
V MOD  
OFF/ON  
MODULATION  
Turns the master V  
modulation function on or off.  
MASTER  
V MOD  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
Y/R/G/B  
Turns the R V modulation  
function on or off.  
R V MOD  
G V MOD  
B V MOD  
Turns the G V modulation  
function on or off.  
Turns the B V modulation  
function on or off.  
Selects the output signal of  
HD SDI, VBS/SDI OUT and  
TEST OUT.  
OUTPUT  
SELECT  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
Contents  
LOW KEY LOW KEY SAT. OFF/ON  
SAT.  
Turns the low key saturation  
function on or off.  
A
L.KEY.SAT.  
LEVEL  
(99 to 99)  
Sets the saturation level of  
the low luminance part.  
L.KEY.SAT.  
RANGE  
LOW/L.MID/ Sets the luminance level at  
H.MID/HIGH which the low key saturation  
function becomes effective.  
Y BLACK  
GAMMA  
OFF/ON  
Turns the Y black gamma  
function on or off.  
Y BLK GAM  
LEVEL  
(99 to 99)  
Sets the gamma curve in the  
low luminance part.  
Y BLK GAM  
RANGE  
LOW/L.MID/ Sets the luminance level at  
H.MID/HIGH which the Y black gamma  
becomes effective.  
Appendix A-29  
Page  
Items  
Contents  
SCENE  
FILE  
1
Recalls the scene file saved in the memory  
of the camcorder.  
2
3
4
5
STANDARD  
Clears all current detail-adjusted settings  
and switch settings and returns the  
settings to the standard settings saved in  
the reference file.  
SCENE  
RECALL  
Recalls the scene file from the memory of  
the camcorder or the memory stick.  
SCENE  
STORE  
Stores the scene file in the memory of the  
camcorder or the memory stick.  
F.ID  
16 characters  
A
A-30 Appendix  
MAINTENANCE Menu List  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
WHT  
SHADING CH SEL  
OUTPUT SELECT  
R/G/B WHITE H SAW  
R/G/B WHITE H PARA  
R/G/B WHITE V SAW  
R/G/B WHITE V PARA  
WHITE SAW/PARA  
SHADING CH SEL  
OUTPUT SELECT  
R/G/B BLACK H SAW  
R/G/B BLACK H PARA  
R/G/B BLACK V SAW  
R/G/B BLACK V PARA  
BLACK SAW/PARA  
MASTER BLACK  
R/G/B  
SHADING  
Y/R/G/B  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
OFF/ON  
BLK  
R/G/B  
SHADING  
Y/R/G/B  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
OFF/ON  
A
(99 to 99)  
MASTER GAIN(TMP)  
-3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/  
36/42 dB  
LEVEL ADJ  
Y LEVEL  
(99 to 99)  
SYNC LEVEL  
Pr LEVEL  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
Pb LEVEL  
(99 to 99)  
TEST SAW  
OUTPUT SELECT  
OFF/ANALOG/DIGITAL  
Y/R/G/B  
Appendix A-31  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
SD LEVEL ADJ SD VBS LEVEL  
SD VBS SETUP LVL  
SD VF Y LEVEL  
(99 to 99)  
0 %/7.5 % a)  
(99 to 99)  
SD VF R-Y LEVEL  
(99 to 99)  
SD VF B-Y LEVEL  
(99 to 99)  
BATTERY  
BEFORE END  
END  
11.0 to 13V  
10.5 to 11.5V  
EE/PB  
VTR MODE-1 VIDEO OUT (F/R)  
AUDIO OUT(F/R)  
CUE/EE  
REC AUDIO OUT  
EE/SAVE  
CAMERA ADAPTER  
AUDIO CH3/4 MODE  
REAR XLR AUTO  
ENBLE/DISABLE  
CH1/2or SW  
OFF/ON  
VTR MODE-2 AU REC EMPHASYS  
CUE REC  
OFF/ON  
A
OFF/ON  
AU REF LEVEL  
18 dB/20 dB  
0 dB/+4 dB/-3 dB  
ON/OFF/AUTO  
SIDE 1/FRONT/F + S1  
SIDE 2/FRONT/F + S2  
SIDE 1/FRONT/F + S1  
SIDE 2/FRONT/F + S2  
AU REF OUT  
AU SG (1KHz)  
MIC CH1 VR SEL  
MIC CH2 VR SEL  
REAR1/WRR LEVEL  
REAR2/WRR LEVEL  
a) Only for the 59.94I format model  
A-32 Appendix  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
VTR MODE-3 TC OUT  
DF/NDFa)  
AUTO/GENE  
DF/NDF  
EXT-LK DF/NDFa)  
INT/EXT  
EXT-LK UBIT  
LTC UBIT  
INT/EXT  
FIX/TIME  
VITC UBIT  
FIX/TIME  
WATCH AUTO ADJ  
UBIT GROUP ID  
OFF/ON  
000/101  
VTR MODE-4 REC TALLY BLINK  
REC START STOP  
MODE SELECT  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
SEL/OFF/CONT  
1H/3H/8H  
TIMER SET  
VTR MODE-5 LTC UB-MARKER  
REC START MARK  
SHOT MARKER 1  
SET/ALL/OFF  
OFF/ON  
A
OFF/ON  
SHOT MARKER 2  
OFF/ON  
SHOT TIME DISP  
MD:HM/DM:HM/D:HMS  
3200  
PRESET WHT COLOR TEMP. <P>  
COLOR FINE  
R GAIN  
<P>  
<P>  
<P>  
<P>  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
OFF/ON  
B GAIN  
AWB ENABLE  
DCC  
DCC FUNCTION SEL  
DCC RANGE  
DCC/AdaptiveKNEE/FIX  
400/450/500/550/600%  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
0 to 3  
DCC POINT  
DCC GAIN  
DCC PEAK FILTER  
DCC DELAY TIME  
(99 to 99)  
a) Only for the 59.94I format model  
Appendix A-33  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
AUTO IRIS 2  
IRIS WINDOW  
IRIS WINDOW IND.  
IRIS LEVEL  
1/2/3/4/5/6/Variable  
OFF/ON  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
20 to 479  
IRIS APL RATIO  
IRIS VAR WIDTH  
IRIS VAR HEIGHT  
IRIS VAR H POS  
IRIS VAR V POS  
IRIS SPEED  
20 to 269  
(480 to 479)  
(270 to 269)  
0/1/2/3/4/5  
OFF/ON  
CLIP HIGH LIGHT  
FUNCTION 3 WHT FILTER INH  
COLOR BAR SEL  
OFF/ON  
SMPTE/100%/75%/  
SMPTE(4:3)/100%(4:3)/  
75%(4:3)  
RM COMMON MEMORY  
GENLOCK  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
OFF/ON  
EXEC  
A
GENLOCK  
ND COMP  
RETURN VIDEO  
GL H PHASE COASE  
GL H PHASE FINE  
ND OFFSET ADJUST  
CLEAR ND OFFSET  
A-34 Appendix  
FILE Menu List  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
USER FILE  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
F. ID  
16 characters  
USER PRESET  
STORE USR PRESET  
CLEAR USR PRESET  
CUSTOMIZE RESET  
LOAD CUSTOM DATA  
LOAD OUT OF USER  
BEFORE FILE PAGE  
USER LOAD WHITE  
ALL FILE LOAD  
ALL FILE SAVE  
F. ID  
USER FILE2  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
ALL FILE  
A
16 characters  
OFF/ON  
ALL PRESET  
STORE ALL PRESET  
CLEAR ALL PRESET  
3SEC CLR PRESET  
1
SCENE FILE  
2
3
4
5
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F. ID  
16 characters  
Appendix A-35  
Page  
Items  
Setting  
REFERENCE  
REFERENCE STORE  
REFERENCE CLEAR  
REFERENCE LOAD  
REFERENCE SAVE  
F. ID  
16 characters  
OFF  
SCENE WHITE DATA  
LENS FILE RECALL  
LENS FILE STORE  
F. ID  
LENS FILE 1  
16 characters  
1.0 to 3.4  
F STOP  
LENS NO OFFSET  
SOURCE MEMORY  
LENS M VMOD  
LENS CENTER H  
LENS CENTER V  
OUTPUT SELECT  
LENS R FLARE  
LENS G FLARE  
LENS B FLARE  
LENS W-R OFST  
LENS W-B OFST  
SHADING CH SEL  
HD TEST OUT SEL  
LENS RGB H SAW  
LENS RGB H PARA  
LENS RGB V SAW  
LENS RGB V PARA  
LENS FILE 2  
(99 to 99)  
480 to 479  
270 to 269  
Y/R/G/B  
A
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
R/G/B  
LENS FILE 3  
Y/R/G/B/RGB  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
(99 to 99)  
MEMORY STICK FORMAT  
TELE FILE  
TELEFILE CLEAR  
A-36 Appendix  
DIAGNOSIS Menu List  
Page  
Itmes  
HOURS METER  
RESET METER  
DRUM RUNNING  
TAPE RUNNING  
OPERATION  
THREADING  
DRUM RUNNING - 2  
TAPE RUNNING - 2  
OPERATION - 2  
THREADING - 2  
ADJUST  
TIME/DATE  
HOUR  
MIN  
SEC  
A
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
ROM VERSION  
AT: Ver X.XX  
SS: Ver X.XX  
FP: Ver X.XX  
EQ: Ver X.XX  
I/O EEPROM LSI  
DOWN CONVERTER  
HD - SDI OUTPUT  
PICTURE CHACHE  
DEV STATUS  
OPTION BOARD  
Appendix A-37  
Index  
ADVANCE button 2-35  
ALARM volume control 2-9  
Aliasing 6-18  
A
AC-550/550CE AC Adaptor 1-7,  
2-1, 5-1, 5-5  
AC-DN2B AC Adaptor 1-7, 2-1,  
5-1, 5-6  
Accessory attachments 2-3  
AC power supply 1-7, 5-5  
Adjusting the flange focal length  
5-12  
Adjustments and settings for  
recording  
ALL menu 4-46  
Anton Bauer Ultralight System 5-6  
ASSIGN switches 2-20, 4-108  
Attaching a UHF portable  
tuner 5-21  
Audio  
audio functions 2-5  
audio level adjustment 4-27  
audio level indicator 4-65  
level meter 2-41, 4-29  
line input 5-25  
testing the audio  
functions 6-7  
assigning the functions to the  
ASSIGN 1/2 switches 4-108  
audio level 4-27  
black balance and white  
balance 4-1  
AUDIO IN switches 2-7  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors  
and LINE/MIC/+48 V ON  
switches 2-8  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 / CH-3/  
CH-4 switches 2-7  
AUDIO OUT connector 2-8  
AUDIO SELECT switches 2-7  
Auto Interval Rec function 3-27  
Automatic iris adjustment 4-20  
AUTO W/B BAL switch 2-20  
electronic shutter 4-12  
memory stick operations  
4-118  
menu display on the  
viewfinder screen 4-46  
selecting the output signals 4-  
100  
setting the color temperature  
4-103  
setting the date/time of the  
internal clock 4-113  
specifying an offset for the  
auto white balance setting 4-  
105  
status display on the  
viewfinder screen 4-64  
time data 4-34  
B
BACK TALLY switch 2-40  
BACK TALLY indictor 2-39  
Battery (See also Power supply.)  
Anton Bauer Ultralight  
System 5-6  
Index  
I-1  
Avoiding breaks in operation  
due to dead batteries 5-4  
BATT indicator 2-46, 3-7,  
6-1, 6-16  
Camera synchronization  
camera synchronization 4-43  
changing to an external power  
supply 4-43  
Battery attachment 2-1  
Battery status indicator 2-46,  
6-16  
BC-L120 Battery Charger  
1-7, 5-1, A-6  
connection example 4-39  
procedure 4-41  
releasing time code  
synchronization 4-43  
setting the user bits 4-42  
Cameraman tally indicator 2-17  
CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch  
2-31  
Hunting 4-9  
Using the BP-L60A Battery  
Pack 1-7, 2-1, 5-1, 5-23  
BC-L120 1-7, 5-1, A-6  
BCT-HD12CL 6-12, A-8  
BKW-401 1-6, 5-10, A-7  
Black balance  
Cassette tape  
loading 3-1  
preventing accidental  
erasure 3-5  
adjusting 4-2  
error message 4-4  
slack checking 3-3  
unloading 3-3  
memory 4-5  
usable cassettes A-6  
CC filter 2-18, 4-7  
Center marker 2-16  
Cleaning  
BP-L60A 1-7, 2-1, 5-1, 5-23, A-6  
BRIGHT control 2-15  
Built-in speaker 2-12  
BCT-HD12CL cleaning  
cassette 6-12, A-8  
video heads 6-12  
C
C-74 1-7, A-7  
CAC-12 Microphone Holder 1-7,  
5-19  
CAC-12 1-7, 5-19, A-7  
Camera section  
features 1-1  
viewfinder 6-12  
Color playback 3-47  
Condensation 6-2  
Continuous recording  
continuous recording 3-12  
continuous recording on  
previous cut (RE-TAKE  
function) 3-44  
specifications A-2  
testing 6-2  
I-2  
Index  
CONTRAST control 2-15  
CRS-3P Cradle Suspension 5-17,  
A-7  
End Search function 3-45  
Equipment setup  
adjusting the flange focal  
length 5-12  
CTL 2-35  
CUE IN switch 2-8  
adjusting the shoulder pad  
position 5-30  
adjusting the viewfinder 5-7  
attaching the shoulder strap  
5-28  
D
DATA DISPLAY switch 2-37  
DCC function 2-21  
audio input system 5-14  
connecting the remote control  
unit 5-33  
mounting the lens 5-11  
power supply 5-1  
putting on the rain cover 5-31  
storing the camcorder in the  
carrying case 5-7  
DC IN connector 2-1  
DC OUT connector 2-8  
DIAGNOSIS menu 4-46, A-37  
Diopter adjustment ring 2-16  
Display panel  
tape status, battery status, and  
level indicators 2-41  
status and warning  
tripod mounting 5-26  
Error messages  
indicators 2-42, 6-16  
time code displays 2-43  
DISPLAY switch 2-35  
DISPLAY (LCD) switch 2-35  
DISPLAY/ASPECT switch 2-39  
Drop frame/non-drop frame mode  
4-36  
adjusting the black balance  
4-4  
adjusting the white balance  
4-10  
memory stick operations  
4-126, 4-129  
Extended Clear Scan mode  
See ECS mode.  
Extender indicator 4-65  
External microphone  
testing 6-8  
use 5-16  
External time code 4-39  
Eyecup 2-14, 6-13  
E
Earphone checking 6-8  
EARPHONE jacks 2-13  
ECS mode 4-12, 4-16  
E-E sound 2-12  
EJECT button 2-27  
Electronic shutter  
See Shutter.  
Index  
I-3  
HOLD button 2-35  
HUMID indicator 2-42, 3-7, 6-1,  
6-16  
F
F-stop indicator 4-66  
F FWD button and indicator 2-27  
FILE menu 4-46, A-35  
Filter  
I, J, K  
CC filter 2-18, 4-7  
filter indicator 4-68  
fog-proof filter 6-15  
ND filter 2-18, 4-7  
protecting filter 6-13  
selecting 2-19, 4-7  
FILTER selector 2-18  
Flicker 4-12  
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch 2-36  
free run/recording run  
switch 2-36, 4-35, 4-38  
Fog-proof filter 1-6, 6-15, A-7  
Internal clock setting 4-113  
Iris setting indicator 4-66  
L
Lens  
lens mount securing rubber 5-  
11  
locking lever 2-4  
mounting 5-11  
mount 2-4  
mount cap 2-4  
LENS connector 2-4  
LEVEL controls 2-7  
LIGHT connector 2-4  
Light shoe 2-3  
G
Gain  
gain indicator 4-67  
setting the GAIN selector  
values 4-97  
LIGHT switch 2-2, 2-40  
Line input (audio) 5-25  
Loop Rec function 3-19  
LTC 1-4, 4-38  
GAIN selector 2-20  
GENLOCK IN connector 2-25,  
2-32  
M
Good shot marker 3-15  
Maintenance  
video head cleaning 6-12  
viewfinder cleaning 6-12  
MAINTENANCE menu 4-46, A-  
31  
H
HD SDI OUT connector 2-24  
HDCA-901 2-8, A-7  
HDVF-20A A-6  
Head cleaning 6-12  
Memory stick  
compartment 2-29  
handling 4-118  
I-4  
Index  
Menu list  
DIAGNOSIS menu list A-37  
O
OPERATION menu 4-46, A-9  
OUTPUT/DCC selector 2-21  
FILE menu list A-35  
MAINTENANCE menu list  
A-31  
OPERATION menu list A-9  
PAINT menu list A-19  
P, Q  
PAINT menu 4-46, A-19  
PEAKING control 2-15  
Playback  
Microphone  
supplied microphone 2-5  
using an external  
microphone 5-17  
using the supplied  
microphone 5-14  
checking the recording 3-46  
color playback 3-47  
parts and controls 2-14  
recording review 3-46  
using a color video monitor  
3-47  
Microphone level adjustment  
external microphone 4-27  
front microphone 4-30  
Microphone holder 5-18  
MENU knob 2-30  
MENU ON/OFF switch 2-31  
MIC IN connector 2-5  
MIC LEVEL knob 2-5  
MLB-1M-100 3-49, A-6  
MONITOR volume control 2-10  
MONITOR switch /CH-1/2 /CH-3/  
4 switch  
PLAY button and indicator 2-27  
POWER switch 2-2  
Power supply (See also Battery.)  
Anton Bauer Ultralight  
System 5-6  
dead battery 5-4  
power supply 2-1  
using the AC-550/550CE AC  
adaptor 1-7, 5-5  
using the AC-DN2B AC  
adaptor 1-7, 5-6  
CH-1/2 /CH-3/4 switch 2-10  
MONITOR switch 2-11  
using the BP-L60A Battery  
Pack 1-7, 5-1  
Precautions 1-8  
PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK  
switch 2-36  
Protecting filter 6-13  
Putting on the rain cover 5-31  
N
ND filter 2-18, 4-7  
Notes on CCD image sensors 6-18  
Index  
I-5  
REMOTE connector 2-24  
Remote control  
R
Real time 4-36, 4-113  
REAR TALLY switch 2-40  
Recording  
connecting a remote control  
unit 5-33  
RM-B150 Remote Control  
Unit 1-6, 2-24, 5-33, 5-34,  
A-7  
basic procedure 3-6  
cassette tape 3-1, A-6  
checking the recording 3-46  
continuous recording 3-12  
continuous recording on  
previous cut (RE-TAKE  
function) 3-44  
recording start marker 3-19  
recording start time code 3-49  
searching for the last recorded  
portion (End search function)  
3-45  
RESET button 2-35  
RE-TAKE function 3-44  
REW button and indicator 2-27  
RF indicator 2-42, 6-16  
RM-B150 1-6, 2-24, 5-33, 5-34,  
A-7  
S
Safety zone marker 2-16  
SCENE file  
shooting pictures at intervals  
(Interval Rec function) 3-27,  
3-38  
loading 4-145  
resetting the camcorder setting  
to the standard setting 4-150  
setting the File ID 4-143  
storing 4-135  
shooting and recording/  
playback functions 2-14  
starting a shoot with a few  
seconds of pre-stored picture  
(Loop Rec function) 3-19  
superimposed shot data 4-80  
Recording review 3-46  
Recording run  
SERVO indicator 2-42, 6-16  
SHIFT button 2-35  
Shooting  
See Recording.  
Shot ID 4-83  
See F-RUN/SET/R-RUN  
switch  
Reference video signal 4-39  
Shoulder pad  
adjusting the position 5-30  
feature 2-4  
I-6  
Index  
Shoulder strap  
attaching the shoulder strap  
T
TALLY indicator 2-14, 2-39  
TALLY switch 2-16, 2-39  
TAPE and E indicator 2-41, 6-16  
Tape (See also Cassette tape.)  
remaining tape indicator 2-41,  
4-66, 6-16  
5-28  
shoulder strap posts 2-3  
Shutter  
changing the range of choice  
of shutter mode and speed  
settings 4-17  
indicator 4-67  
ECS mode 4-16  
selecting mode and speed  
4-13  
setting the electronic  
shutter 4-12  
testing the tape transport  
functions 6-6  
TC IN connector 2-33  
TC OUT connector 2-33  
TEST OUT connector 2-24  
Tele-File 3-49  
Testing  
shutter modes 4-12  
standard mode 4-12  
S-EVS mode 4-12  
SHUTTER selector 2-20  
SLACK indicator 2-42, 6-16  
Speaker  
See Testing the camcorder  
before shooting.  
Testing the camcorder before  
shooting  
audio level adjusting  
functions 6-7  
camera section 6-2  
earphone 6-8  
operation 2-12  
testing 6-8  
Specifications A-1  
STATUS ON/SEL / OFF switch 2-  
30  
external microphones 6-8  
front microphone 6-7  
iris function 6-5  
Status confirmation window 4-89  
STOP button 2-27  
Storage precautions 1-8  
Super Enhanced Vertical definition  
System mode  
preparations for testing 6-1  
speaker 6-8  
tape transport functions 6-6  
time code function 6-10  
user bit functions 6-10  
viewfinder 6-3  
See S-EVS mode.  
S-EVS mode 4-12  
Supplied accessories A-6  
System configuration 1-6  
VTR section 6-6  
Index  
I-7  
XLR connection automatic  
detection function 6-9  
zoom function 6-5  
Testing the iris and zoom  
functions 6-5  
U
User bits  
checking 6-10  
displaying 2-44  
memory 4-37  
resetting 4-38  
setting 4-37  
Time code  
checking 6-10  
displaying 2-35, 2-43  
free run mode 2-36  
free run/recording run  
switch 2-36  
preset/regeneration switch  
2-36  
synchronization 4-42  
User file  
see USER menu setting  
USER menu setting  
data to be saved as a user file  
4-125  
resetting 2-35  
setting 4-34  
loading from the memory  
stick 4-126  
switch settings and displayed  
information 2-44  
synchronizing 4-39  
time code system 2-32  
Time counter display 2-43  
Time data  
resetting 4-133  
saving as the user file to the  
memory stick 4-122  
setting the file ID 4-130  
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
menu 4-46, 4-55  
displaying 2-43  
resetting 4-35  
setting 4-34  
Using the supplied microphone  
5-14  
TOP menu 4-47  
Tripod  
V
Vertical smear 6-18  
Video  
adaptor 5-26  
mount 2-4  
mounting 5-26  
head cleaning 6-12  
monitor 1-6, 3-47, 3-48  
TURBO GAIN button 2-22  
I-8  
Index  
Viewfinder  
adjusting the position 5-7  
W
WARNING indicator 2-40, 6-16  
Warnings and indications  
display panel indications  
2-41, 6-16  
BATT indicator 2-46  
BKW-401 Rotation  
Bracket 1-6, 5-10  
cleaning 6-12  
parts and controls 2-38  
status confirmation window  
4-89  
TALLY indicator 2-39, 6-16  
viewfinder screen displays  
6-16  
detaching 5-9  
display mode and setting  
change and adjustment  
progress message 4-72  
front-rear positioning lever  
2-16, 5-8  
warning sound 2-9, 6-16  
warning system 6-16  
White balance  
indicators on the viewfinder  
2-45  
left-right positioning ring  
2-16, 5-7  
REC indicator 2-45  
related equipment A-7  
selecting display items 4-69  
setting 4-77  
adjusting 4-6  
error messages 4-10  
if you have no time to adjust  
the white balance 4-11  
memory indicator 4-67  
memory 4-11  
status display 4-64  
stopper 2-17, 5-9  
testing 6-3  
WHITE BAL switch 2-22  
WRR-810A/860A/862A/862B 1-7,  
5-23, A-7  
VTR SAVE indicator 2-46  
WRR-855A/855B 1-7, 5-22, A-7  
VITC 1-4, 4-38  
VTR  
specifications A-3  
Z
Zebra pattern 2-15  
ZEBRA switch 2-15  
Zoom  
testing 6-6  
operation and status  
indicators 2-41  
position indicator 4-65  
testing 6-5  
features 1-4  
VTR SAVE/STBY switch 2-27  
VTR START button 2-26  
VBS/SDI OUT connector 2-23  
Index  
I-9  
Name  
Office  
Address  
Phone  
The material contained in this manual consists of information that  
is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely for use  
by the purchasers of the equipment described in this manual.  
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion  
of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other than the  
operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this  
manual without the express written permission of Sony  
Corporation.  
Sony Corporation  
B & P Company  
Printed in Japan  
2002.08.13  
©2001  
HDW-750/750CE (SY)  
3-205-316-04 (1)  

Tokina VARIFOCAL LENS TVR2314 User Manual
Sony XTL 750W User Manual
Sony WM EX501 User Manual
Sony cCFD S20CP User Manual
Sony Camcorder HDR SR12E User Manual
Sony Camcorder D90N User Manual
Smith Cast Iron Boilers GB100W User Manual
Sennheiser COM 1420 User Manual
Samsung W80 User Manual
Samsung EC PL210ZBPUUS User Manual